262
D R I V I N G IS B E L I E V I N G 2005

gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    1

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

D R I V I N G IS B E L I E V I N G

2005

Page 2: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

A010A02A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE

o New Vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Limited Warrantyo New Vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (original owner only)o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty - Federal Vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is provided in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

A020A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibilityto see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals.When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations.Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.

Page 3: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

OWNER'S MANUAL

A030A05F-AAT

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at anytime so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai Tiburon models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

HGK037

Page 4: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people whodrive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of whichwe're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you readit carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that maybe required.

A050A04A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leavethe manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do notmeet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifica-tions listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appearin the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2005 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored inany retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai MotorCompany.

!

Page 5: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

A070A01A-AAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safetyor durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportationand other federal or state agencies.

A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for animproperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For thisreason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundaidealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

!

Page 6: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons ifthe warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution isnot heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

!

!

Page 7: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

A100A03A-AAT

GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same partsused by Hyundai Motor Company to manu-facture vehicles. They are designed andtested for the optimum safety, performance,and reliability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered andbuilt to meet rigid manufacturing require-ments. Using imitation, counterfeit or usedsalvage parts is not covered under theHyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty orany other Hyundai warranty. In addition, anydamage to or failure of Genuine HyundaiParts caused by the installation or failure of

an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage partis not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo onthe package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the UnitedStates are packaged with labels written onlyin English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold throughauthorized Hyundai Dealerships.

To find the closest authorized dealer call1-800-826-CARS

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

Page 8: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

Page 9: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

B250A02GK-AAT

B250A01GK-A

Page 10: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Switch (If installed) 2. Panel Brightness Control Knob

(Rheostat Switch) 3. Multi-Function Light Switch 4. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 5. Front Fog Light switch (If installed) 6. Hazard Warning Switch 7. Digital Clock 8. Passenger's Air Bag 9. Glove Box10.Hood Release Lever

11.Fuse Box Relay12.Steering Wheel Tilt Lever (If installed)13.Horn and Driver's Airbag14.Cruise Control Switch (If installed)15.Heating and Cooling Controls16.Ashtray17.Cigarette Lighter18.Shift Lever19.Audio System (If installed)20.Parking Brake Lever21.Center Console

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster noron the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster,instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak ontothese areas, wash them with water immediately.

!

Page 11: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A02GK-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-36.

Malfunction Indicator Light

SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If installed)

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Parking Brake/ Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

CRUISE Indicator Light (If installed)

Seat Belt Reminder Light and Chime

CRUISE SET Indicator Light (If installed)

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Indicator Lights (If installed)

Page 12: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3Keys .............................................................................. 1-3Door (Teft-Alarm System) ...................................... 1-4, 1-6Power Windows ............................................................ 1-8Seats ............................................................................. 1-9Seat Belts.................................................................... 1-14Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-20Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System (SRS) ..... 1-26Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ...................... 1-34Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-36Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-45Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch ............................... 1-47Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-53Mirror ........................................................................... 1-56Hood Release ............................................................. 1-59Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-65Audio Remote Control Switch ..................................... 1-67Heating and Cooling Control ....................................... 1-69Stereo Sound System ................................................. 1-86Audio System.............................................................. 1-88Antenna ..................................................................... 1-125

1

Page 13: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-ranty may not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance problems thatare caused by the use of fuels containingmethanol or fuels containing MTBE (MethylTertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxy-gen Content 2.7% weight.)

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasolineand 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be usedin your Hyundai. However, if your engine devel-ops driveability problems, the use of 100%unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels withunspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcoholsother than ethanol, should not be used.

B010A01JM-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)or higher must be used in your Hyundai.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) shouldnot be used in your Hyundai. This type of fuelcan reduce vehicle performance and damagecomponents of the fuel system.

!

B010A02GK

UNLEADEDFUEL ONLY

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE

Hyundai recommends that fuels containingMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) should notbe used in your Hyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (OxygenContent 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle per-formance and produce vapor lock or hardstarting.

CAUTION:o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle

shut off when refueling.o The fuel cap must be tightened until cap

clicks, otherwise " " light may illumi-nate.

!

Page 14: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

3BREAKING IN YOUR NEWHYUNDAI

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai rec-ommends that you use gasolines treated withdetergent additives, which help prevent depositformation in the engine. These gasolines willhelp the engine run cleaner and enhance per-formance of the Emission Control System.

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai in anothercountry, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding registra-tion and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

B020A01S-AAT

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000 Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is required withyour new Hyundai. However, you can contrib-ute to the economical operation and durability ofyour Hyundai by observing the following recom-mendations during the first 1,200 miles (2,000km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm,

or revolutions per minute) between 2,000rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the accelerator pedalfully.

o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to avoidhard stops.

o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don'tdrive so slowly in too high a gear that theengine "bucks"-shift to a lower gear).

o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speedfrom time to time.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutesat one time.

o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles(2,000 km) of operation.

KEYS

B030A01A-AAT

For greater convenience, the same key oper-ates all the locks in your Hyundai. However,because the doors can be locked without a key,carrying a spare key is recommended in caseyou accidentally lock one key inside the car.

B030A01E

Page 15: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

4

WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Be-

fore you drive away (especially if thereare children in the car), be sure that all thedoors are securely closed and locked sothat the doors cannot be inadvertentlyopened from the inside. This helps en-sure that the doors will not be openedaccidentally. Also, when combined withthe proper use of seat belts, locking thedoors helps keep occupants from beingejected from the car in case of an acci-dent.

o Before opening the door, always look forand avoid oncoming traffic.

o In case of accident, the door is unlockedautomatically (If installed).

!

DOOR

B040A02Y-AAT

DOOR LOCKSB030C01Y-AAT

ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH(If installed)

Whenever a door is opened, the ignition switchwill be illuminated for your convenience, pro-vided the ignition switch is not in the "ON"position.The light will go off approximately 10 secondsafter closing the door or when the ignition switchis turned on.

B030C01E-1

B030B01S-AAT

Record Your Key Number

A code number is stamped on the key numberplate that came with the keys to your Hyundai.This key number plate should be kept in a safeplace, not in the vehicle. The key number shouldalso be recorded in a place where it can be foundin an emergency.

If you need additional keys, or if you should loseyour keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer canmake new keys if you can supply the keynumber.

B030B01E

Page 16: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

5

B040C01S-AAT

Locking From the Outside

The doors can be locked without a key.To lock the doors first push the inside lockswitch to the "LOCK" position so that the redmark on the switch is not visible, then close thedoor.

NOTE:o When locking the door this way, be care-

ful not to lock the door with the ignitionkey left in the vehicle.

o To reduce the chance of theft, alwaysremove the ignition key, close all win-dows, and lock all doors when leavingyour vehicle unattended.

HGK2009

B040B01JM-AAT

Locking and unlocking front doors with akey

o The door can be locked or unlocked with akey.

o Lock the door by turning the key toward thefront of the vehicle and unlock it by turning thekey toward the rear.

NOTE:The driver's door can be unlocked by turn-ing the key once toward the rear. If you wishto unlock all doors, turn the key againtoward the rear within 4 seconds.The passenger's side will lock or unlock alldoors with just one rotation.

HGK2008

LOCK

UNLOCK

B040D01S-AAT

Locking From the Inside

To lock the doors from the inside, simply closethe door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"position. When this is done, neither the outsidenor the inside door handle can be used.

NOTE:When the door is locked, the red mark on theswitch is not visible.

HGK2010

UNLOCK

LOCK

Page 17: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

6

B070B02GK-AAT

Armed Stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm thesystem as described below.

1) Remove the ignition key from the ignitionswitch.

2) Make sure that the engine hood and tail gateare closed and latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of thekeyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the turnsignal light will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

!

HGK2009

B040G01GK-GAT

Central Door Lock

The central door locking is operated by pushingthe driver's door lock switch toward the front orrear of the vehicle. If the passenger door is openwhen the switch is pushed, the door will remainlocked when closed.

NOTE:o When pushing the switch toward the

rear, all doors will unlock.When pushing the switch toward thefront, all doors will lock.

o When the door is unlocked, the red markon the switch is visible.

o The central door locking is operated byturning the key (driver's door only) to-ward the front or rear of the vehicle.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B070A01A-AAT

(If Installed)

This system is designed to provide protectionfrom unauthorized entry into the car. This sys-tem is operated in three stages: the first is the"Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage,and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-gered, the system provides an audible alarmwith blinking of the turn signal light.

NOTE:1) If any door, tail gate or engine hood

remains open, the system will not bearmed.

2) If this happens, rearm the system asdescribed above.

3) Once the system is armed, only the tailgate may be unlocked using the keywithout disarming the system.

CAUTION:Do not arm the system until all passengershave left the car. If the system is armed whilea passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarmmay be activated when the remainingpassenger(s) leaves the car.

Page 18: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

7

!

B070C01GK-AAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the followingoccur while the car is parked and the system isarmed.

1) A front door is unlocked and opened withoutusing the transmitter.

2) The tail gate is opened without using the key.3) The engine hood is opened.

The siren will sound and the turn signal lamp willblink continuously for 30 seconds. (This hap-pens 3 times). To turn off the system, unlock thedoor with the transmitter.

CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine while thesystem is armed.

!

B070D04GK-AAT

Disarmed Stage

The system will be disarmed when either of thefollowing steps are taken:

1) The driver's or passenger's door is un-locked by depressing the "UNLOCK" buttonon the transmitter.

2) In the middle of alarming or after alarming, itkeeps for 30 seconds when the key is turnedto the "ON" position.

After completing one of steps above, the turnsignal light will blink twice to indicate that thesystem is disarmed.

NOTE:If any door, tail gate or engine hood is notopened within 30 seconds, the system willbe rearmed.

HGK102

LOCK

UNLOCK

B070F01A-AAT

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (If installed)

NOTE:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion.

WARNING:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter.3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal

lights will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.2. At the same time all doors unlock, the turn

signal lights will blink twice to indicate that thesystem is disarmed.

Page 19: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

8 POWER WINDOW

B050A01GK-AAT

The power windows operate only when theignition key is in the "ON" position. The mainswitches are located on the driver's arm restand control the front windows on the respectivesides of the vehicle. The windows may beopened by depressing the front portion of theswitch. To stop at the desired opening, releasethe switch. The window may be closed by pullingthe front portion of the switch. In order to preventoperation of the passenger front window by thepassenger, a window lock switch (1) is providedon the arm rest of the driver's door. To disablethe passenger's power window, push the win-dow lock switch. To revert to normal operation,push in on the window lock switch again.

HGK2015

(1)

B070E02GK-GAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery begins to getweak, it may take several pushes on the buttonto lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will notlight. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type : CR2032

Replacement instructions:

1. Carefully separate the case with a bladescrewdriver as shown in the illustration.

HGK122

Screwdriver

2. Remove the old battery from the case andnote the polarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same(+side facingdown), then insert it in the transmitter.

NOTE:Install a new battery within 30 seconds afterremoving the old one. If installing a newbattery takes more than 30 seconds, takethe following steps.

1) Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" posi-tion.

2) Make sure that the turn signal lampsblink once by pushing the "LOCK" or"UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.

HGK121

Battery

Page 20: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

9

!

HGK2016

WARNING:(1)Be careful that someone's head, hands

and body are not trapped by a closingwindow.

(2)Never try to operate the main switch onthe driver's door and the individual doorwindow switch in opposing directionsat the same time. If this is done, thewindow will stop and cannot be openedor closed.

(3)Do not leave children alone in the car.Always remove the ignition key for theirsafety.

Auto-Down Window (Driver's Side)(If Installed)

The Auto-Down window is moved to its fullyopen position by pushing the switch. To stop atthe desired position push in on the switch again.

B050A02GK

!

SEATS

B080A01A-AAT

ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS

WARNING:Never attempt to adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving. This could result in lossof control or an accident which may causedeath, serious injury or property damage.

Page 21: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

10

! WARNING:To minimize risk of severe injury in theevent of a collision or a sudden stop, boththe driver's and passenger's seatbacksshould always be in an upright positionwhile the vehicle is in motion. The protec-tion provided by the seat belts and airbagsin a frontal collision may be reduced signifi-cantly when the seatbacks are reclined.There is greater risk that the driver andpassenger will slide under the seatbelt whichmay result in serious injury if a crash occurswhen the seatbacks are reclined. The seatbelt and airbags cannot provide properprotection to an occupant if the seatback isreclined.

B080C01A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, lean forward to takeyour weight off it, then pull up on the reclinercontrol lever at the outside edge of the seat. Nowlean back until the desired seatback angle isachieved. To lock the seatback into position,release the recliner control lever.

HGK2028

!

B080B02A-AAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

To move the seat toward the front or rear, pullthe lock release lever upward. This will releasethe seat on its track so you can move it forwardor rearward to the desired position. When youfind the position you want, release the lever andslide the seat forward or rearward on its trackuntil it locks into the desired position and cannotbe moved further.

HGK2027

WARNING:To ensure the seat is locked securely, at-tempt to move the seat forward or rearwardwithout using the lock release lever.

Page 22: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

11

B080D02JM-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reduce the riskof neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower it, pushit down while pressing the lock knob. To removethe headrest, raise it as far as it can go thenpress the lock knob while pulling upward. Thisshould only be done when the seat is notoccupied.

Lock Knob

HGK2032

!

B080D01JM

o For maximum effectiveness in case of anaccident the headrest should be ad-justed so the middle of the headrest is atthe same height as the top of theoccupant's eyes. For this reason, theuse of a cushion that holds the bodyaway from the seatback is not recom-mended.

o Do not operate vehicle with the head-rests removed as injury to the occupantsmay occur in the event of an accident.Headrests may provide protection againstneck injuries when properly adjusted.

o Do not adjust the headrest hejght whilethe vehicle is in motion.

WARNING:

B080E01F-AAT

Lumbar Support Control(Driver's seat only)

The driver's seat is equipped with adjustablelumbar support.To increase the amount of lumbar support, pullthe lever forward.To decrease it, push the lever toward the rear.

SOFT

HGK2030

FIRM

Page 23: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

12

B130A01GK-AAT

REAR SEAT ENTRY (Walk in device)

The driver and front passenger's seatbacksshould be tilted to enter the rear seat.

By pulling up the walk in device lever (1) at theleft-upper side of the driver side seatback, theseatback will tilt forward. Then pull the lockrelease lever (2) up to move the seat forward.

HGK2036

(1)

(2)!

B129A01F-AAT

REAR SEAT POSITIONS

WARNING:This vehicle contains two rear seating po-sitions only and a seat belt for each seatingposition. Thus, never permit more than twooccupants to ride in the rear seat becausean unrestrained occupant could be seri-ously injured or killed in the event of avehicle crash.

B129A01GK

B080F01F-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)

To raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion, turn the knob forward or rearward.

HGK2029

Page 24: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

13

!

By pulling up the walk in device lever (1) at theright-upper side of the passenger side seatback,the seatback will tilt forward. Then push the seatforward to allow the occupants to enter.

Recliner MemoryBy pulling up the walk in device lever (1) theseatback is reclined and returned to the originalposition.

WARNING:Don't drive with the passenger side seatbackreclined. It is dangerous to move it whiledriving. Be sure the seatback is caterredfirmly before driving.

HGK2036-1

(1)

B099A01F-AAT

BEFORE FOLDING THE REAR SEATS

In order to prevent the shoulder belt from beingdamaged while folding the rear seat, the shoul-der belt must be passed through the hanger tokeep it out of the way.

CAUTION:Seat belts must be removed from the hangerwhen in use.

!

HGK2034

B110A02S-AAT

FOLDING REAR SEATBACKS

The rear seatbacks may be folded to facilitatecarrying long items or to increase the luggagecapacity of the vehicle.

o To unlock the seatback, push the seatbacklocking button, then pull forward on theseatback panel.

o When you return the seatback to its uprightposition, always be sure it has locked intoposition by pulling and pushing on the top ofthe seatback.

HGK2035

Page 25: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

14

!

SEAT BELTS

B150A01S-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

WARNING:All occupants of the vehicle must wear theirseat belts at all times. Note that this vehicleis equipped with a Supplemental Restraint(Airbag) System as discussed beginningon page 1-26. The seat belts must be usedin conjunction with the supplementalairbag system. State laws may require thatsome or all occupants of the vehicle useseat belts. The possibility of increased in-jury or severity of injury in an accident willbe increased if this elementary safety pre-caution is not observed. In addition, followthe other instructions provided in this sec-tion.

!B140A01S-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

For the safety of all passengers, luggage orother cargo should not be piled higher than thetop of the seatback. In addition, do not placeobjects on the rear shelf as they may moveforward during braking or in an accident andstrike vehicle passengers.

B140A01GK

! WARNING:The purpose of the fold-down rearseatbacks is to allow you to carry longerobjects than could otherwise be accommo-dated. Never allow passengers to sit on topof the folded down seat back while the caris moving as this is not a proper seatingposition and no seat belts are available foruse. This could result in injury in case of anaccident or sudden stop. Objects carriedon the folded down seatback should notextend higher than the top of the frontseats. This could allow cargo to slide for-ward and cause injury or damage duringsudden stops.

Page 26: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

15

!

B150B03Y-AAT

Infant or Small Child

All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.Information about the use of these restraintsbegins on page 1-20.

WARNING:Every person in your vehicle needs to beproperly restrained at all times, includinginfants and children. In a collision, an unre-strained child can become a "missile" in-side the car. The force required to hold achild on your lap could be so great that youcould not hold the child. Any child riding inthe vehicle should always be in a properrestraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.

NOTE:Small children are best protected from in-jury in an accident when properly restrainedin the rear seat by a child restraint systemthat meets the requirements of the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Beforebuying any child restraint system, makesure that it has a label certifying that itmeets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dard 213. The restraint must be appropriate

B150C02A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for child restraintsystems should always occupy the rear seatand use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lapportion should be fastened snug on the hips andas low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. Achild's squirming could put the belt out of posi-tion. Children are afforded the most safety in theevent of an accident when they are restrainedby a proper restraint system in the rear seat. Ifa larger child (over age 13) must be seated inthe front seat, the child should be securelyrestrained by the available lap/shoulder belt andthe seat should be placed in the rearmostposition. Children under the age of 13 should berestrained securely in the rear seat. Neverplace a child under the age of 13 in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the frontseat of a vehicle.

for your child's height and weight. Checkthe label on the child restraint for thisinformation. See page 1-20.

B150D01A-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended forpregnant women to lessen the chance of injuryin an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lapbelt portion should be placed as low and snuglyas possible on the hips, not across the abdo-men. For specific recommendations, consult aphysician.

B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when an injuredperson is being transported. When this is nec-essary, you should consult a physician forrecommendations.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) should neverattempt to use a single seat belt. This couldincrease the severity of injuries in case of anaccident.

Page 27: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

16

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If beltsbecome dirty, they can be cleaned by using amild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,strong detergents or abrasives should not beused because they may damage and weakenthe fabric.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assembliesshould be replaced if the vehicle has beeninvolved in an accident. This should be doneeven if no damage is visible. Additional ques-tions concerning seat belt operation should bedirected to your Hyundai Dealer.

!

B160A01A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never be disassembledor modified. In addition, care should be taken toassure that seat belts and belt hardware are notdamaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatback wasfolded down, be careful not to damage theseat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure thatthe webbing or buckle does not get caughtor pinched in the rear seat.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts be in-spected periodically for wear or damage of anykind. Parts of the system that are damagedshould be replaced as soon as possible.

!

B150G01A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event ofan accident and to achieve maximum effective-ness of the restraint system, all passengersshould be sitting up and the front seats shouldbe in an upright position when the car is moving.A seat belt cannot provide proper protec-tion ifthe person is lying down in the rear seat or if thefront seat is in a reclined position.

WARNING:Sitting in a reclined position or lying downwhen your vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even if you buckle up, your seatbelts can't do their job when you're re-clined.The shoulder belt can't do its job becauseit won't be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crashyou could go into it with great force, receiv-ing serious neck or other injuries.The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be applied there, notat your strong pelvic bones.This could cause serious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright.Then sit back in the seat and wear your seatbelt properly. See page 1-17.

Page 28: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

17

B170A04A-AAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATSHOULDER BELT

You can adjust the height of the shoulder beltanchor to one of the 4 positions for maximumcomfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too nearyour neck, you will not be getting the mosteffective protection. The shoulder portion shouldbe adjusted so that it lies across your chest andmidway over your shoulder nearest the doorand not your neck.To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,lower or raise the height adjuster into an appro-priate position. To raise the height adjuster, pullit up. To lower it, push it down while pressing theheight adjuster button.

HGK2038

!

Release the button to lock the anchor intoposition. Try sliding the height adjuster to makesure that it has locked into the position.

WARNING:o The height adjuster must be in the locked

position when the vehicle is moving.o The misadjustment of height of the

shoulder belt could reduce the effective-ness of the seat belt in a crash.

B180A01L-AAT

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System withEmergency Locking Retractor:To Fasten Your Belt

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion is adjustedmanually so that it fits snugly around your hips.If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, thebelt will extend and let you move around. If thereis a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt willlock into position. It will also lock if you try to leanforward too quickly.

B180A01L

Page 29: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

18

!

NOTE:Although the combination retractor pro-vides the same level of protection for seatedpassengers in either emergency or auto-matic locking modes, it is recommendedthat seated passengers use the emergencylocking feature for improved convenience.The automatic locking function is intendedto facilitate child restraint installation. Toconvert from the automatic locking featureto the emergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully re-tract.

WARNING:o For maximum restraint system protec-

tion, seat belts must always be usedwhenever the car is moving.

o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright position.

o Children must always be seatbelted inthe rear seats. Never allow children toride in the front passenger seat.

o The shoulder belt should be positionedmidway over the shoulder nearest thedoor for the most effective protection.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door. Wearing the belt underthe arm nearest the door could causeserious or fatal injuries in an accident.

B190A01Y-AAT

SEAT BELTS -Front Passenger and RearSeat 3-Point System with CombinationLocking RetractorTo Fasten Your Belt

Combination retractor type seat belts are in-stalled in the rear seat positions to help accom-modate the installation of child restraint sys-tems. Hyundai strongly recommends that chil-dren always be seated in the rear seat. NEVERplace any infant restraint system in the frontseat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines the features ofboth an emergency locking retractor seat beltand an automatic locking retractor seat belt. Tofasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle. When not securing a child restraint,the seat belt operates in the same way as thedriver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retrac-tor Type). It automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion of the seatbelt is adjusted manually so that it fits snuglyaround your hips. When the seat belt is fullyextended from the retractor to allow the instal-lation of a child restraint system, the seat beltoperation changes to allow the belt to retract, butnot to extend. (Automatic Locking RetractorType) see page 1-24.

Check to make sure that the belt is properlylocked and that the belt is not twisted.

NOTE:Seat belt reminder light comes and stays onuntil the seat belt is fastened when theignition key is turned "ON" or "START".And, the warning chime will also sound forabout 6 seconds.

Page 30: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

19

!o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. A

twisted belt can't do its job as well. In acollision, it could even cut into you. Besure the belt webbing is straight and nottwisted.

o Be careful not to damage the belt web-bing or hardware. If the belt webbing orhardware is damaged, replace it.

WARNING:

!

B200A01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion as lowas possible and snugly across your hips,not on your waist. If the lap belt is locatedtoo high on your waist, it may increase thechance of injury in the event of a collision.Both arms should not be under or over thebelt. Rather, one should be over and theother under, as shown in the illustration.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door.

B200A01L

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

The seat belt is released by pressing the re-lease button in the locking buckle. When it isreleased, the belt should automatically drawback into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt to be sureit is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01L

Page 31: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

20

!o Always make sure that the shoulder belt

portion of the lap/shoulder belt is posi-tioned midway over the shoulder, neveracross the neck or behind the back.Moving the child closer toward the seatbelt buckle may help provide a goodshoulder belt fit. The lap belt portion ofthe lap/shoulder belt or the center seatlap belt must always be positioned aslow as possible on the child's hips andas snug as possible.

o If the seat belt will not properly fit thechild, Hyundai recommends the use ofan approved booster seat in the rear seatin order to raise the child's seating heightso that the seat belt will properly fit thechild. Before purchasing a booster seat,make sure that it meets applicable Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(FMVSS) and that it is satisfactory foruse with this vehicle.

o Never allow a child to stand up or kneelon the seat.

o Never use an infant carrier or child safetyseat that "hooks" over a seatback; it maynot provide adequate security in an ac-cident.

WARNING:! WARNING:o A child restraint system must be placed

in the rear seat. Never install a child orinfant seat on the front passenger's seat.Should an accident occur and cause thepassenger side airbag to deploy, it couldseverely injure or kill an infant or childseated in an infant or child seat. Thus,only use a child restraint in the rear seatof your vehicle.

o A safety belt or child restraint systemcan become very hot if it is left in a closedvehicle on a sunny day, even if the out-side temperature does not feel hot. Besure to check the seat cover and bucklesbefore placing a child there.

o When the child restraint system is not inuse, store it in the trunk or fasten it witha safety belt so that it will not be thrownforward in the case of a sudden stop oran accident.

o Children who are too large to be in a childrestraint should still sit in the rear seatand be restrained with the available lap/shoulder belts. Never allow children toride in the front passenger seat.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

B230A03A-AAT

Children riding in the car should sit in the rearseat and must always be properly restrained tominimize the risk of injury in an accident, suddenstop or sudden maneuver. According to acci-dent statistics provided by the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),children are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seats than in the front seat. Largerchildren not in a child restraint should use oneof the seat belts provided.All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.You must use a commercially available childrestraint system that meets the requirements ofthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(FMVSS).Children could be injured or killed in a crash iftheir restraints are not properly secured. Forsmall children and babies, a child seat or infantseat must be used. Before buying a particularchild restraint system, make sure it fits your carand seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all theinstructions provided by the manufacturer wheninstalling the child restraint system.

Page 32: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

21

!o Never allow a child to be held in a person's

arms while they are in a moving vehicle,as this could result in serious injury tothe child in the event of an accident or asudden stop. Holding a child in a movingvehicle does not provide the child withany means of protection during an acci-dent, even if the person holding the childis wearing a seat belt.

WARNING:

B230B02GK-GAT

Using a Child Restraint System

For small children and babies, the use of a childseat or infant seat is required. This child seat orinfant seat should be of appropriate size for thechild and should be installed in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in the vehicle'srear seat since this can make an importantcontribution to safety. Your vehicle is providedwith two child restraint hook holders for installing the child seat or infant seat.

B230C04F-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the"Tether Anchorage" System

Two child restraint hook holders are located onthe luggage compartment floor.

To install the child restraint seat

B230E02GK

Tether Anchor Cover Child RestraintHook Holder

B230E01GK

Covering shelf

Front of Vehicle

Tether strap hook

Blanking covers

Rear luggage compartment floor

1. Open the tether anchor cover on the rearluggage compartment floor.

2. Route the child restraint seat strap over theseatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrests, routethe tether strap under the headrest andbetween the headrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of the seatback.

3. Remove the blanking covers on the cover-ing shelf.

4. Connect the tether strap hook to the childrestraint hook holder through the hole on thecovering shelf and tighten to secure the seat.

Child RestraintHook Holders

Page 33: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

22

!

! WARNING:o There is no center rear seating position.o Do not install a child restraint seat at the

center of the rear seat using the vehicle'sISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors areonly provided for the left and right out-board of the rear seat. Do not misuse theISOFIX anchors by attempting to attacha child restraint seat in the middle of therear seat position to the ISOFIX anchors.In a crash, the child restraint seat ISOFIXattachments may not be strong enoughto secure the child restraint seat prop-erly in the center of the rear seat and maybreak, causing serious injury or death.

o Do not mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a childrestraint lower anchorage point. theimproper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.

o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatiblechild restraint seat only to the appropri-ate locations shown in the illustration.

o Always follow the installation and useinstructions provided by the manufac-turer of the child restraint.

B230D01GK-AAT

Securing the child Restraint seat withthe "ISOFIX" system

Some child seat manufacturers make childrestraint seats that are labeled as ISOFIX orISOFIX-compatible child restraint seats. Theseseats include two rigid or webbing mountedattachments that connect to two ISOFIX an-chors at specific seating positions in your ve-hicle. This type of child restraint seat eliminatesthe need to use seat belts to attach the child seatfor forward-facing child restraint seats.ISOFIX anchors have been provided in yourvehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are located in the

B230F01GK

left and right outboard rear seating positions.Their locations are shown in the illustration.

WARNING:Do not mount more than one child restraintto a single tether or to a child restraint loweranchorage point. The improper increasedload may cause the anchorage points ortether anchor to break, causing seriousinjury or death.

Page 34: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

23

!

Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc-tions to properly install child restraint seats withISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the ISOFIX child re-straint, assure that the seat is properly attachedto the ISOFIX and tether anchors. Also, test thechild restraint seat before you place the child init. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also try to tugthe seat forward. Check to see if the anchorshold the seat in place.

WARNING:If the child restraint is not anchored prop-erly, the risk of a child being seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision greatly in-creases.

HGK261

B230G01O-AAT

Installation on outboard Rear Seats

To install a child restraint system in the outboardrear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirelyfrom its retractor until a "click" is felt. This willengage the seat belt retractor automatic lockingfeature, which allows the seat belt to retract butnot extend. Install the child restraint system,buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt totake up any slack. Make sure that the lap portionof the belt is tight around the child restraintsystem and the shoulder portion of the belt ispositioned so that it can not interfere with thechild's head or neck. Also, double check to besure that the retractor has engaged the auto-matic locking feature by trying to extend web-

On outboard rear seats

HGK1010The ISOFIX anchors are located between theseatback and the seat cushion of the rear seatleft and right outboard seating positions.

B230D02GK

ISOFIX Anchor ISOFIX AnchorPosition Indicator

Page 35: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

24

B180B03GK-AAT

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt (If Installed)

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver'sand front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to makesure that the seat belts fit tightly against theoccupant's body in certain frontal collisions.The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedalone or, where the frontal collision is severeenough, together with the airbags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly, theseat belt retractor will lock into position. Incertain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner willactivate and pull the seat belt into tighter contactagainst the occupant's body.

HXG229

! WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Automatic

Locking mode, the child restraint sys-tem can move when your vehicle turns orstops abruptly.

o Do not install any child restraint systemin the front passenger seat. Should anaccident occur and cause the passengerside airbag to deploy, it could severelyinjure or kill an infant or child seated inan infant or child seat. Therefore, onlyuse a child restraint system in the rearseat of your vehicle.

bing out of the retractor. If the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode, the belt will be locked.After installation of the child restraint system, tryto move it in all directions to be sure the childrestraint system is securely installed. If youneed to tighten the belt, pull more webbingtoward the retractor. When you unbuckle theseat belt and allow it to retract, the retractor willautomatically revert back to its normal seatedpassenger emergency locking usage condi-tion.

NOTE:o Before installing the child restraint sys-

tem in any seating position, read theinstructions supplied by the child re-straint system manufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate as de-scribed, have the system checked imme-diately by your authorized Hyundaidealer.

Page 36: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

25

NOTE:o Both the driver's and front passenger's

pre-tensioner seat belts will be activatedin certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedalone or, where the frontal collision issevere enough, together with theairbags.

o When the pre-tensioner seat belts areactivated, a loud noise may be heard andfine dust, which may appear to be smoke,may be visible in the passenger com-partment. These are normal operatingconditions and are not hazardous.

o Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and should notbe breathed for prolonged periods. Washall exposed skin areas thoroughly afteran accident in which the pre-tensionerseat belts were activated.

! WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn correctly.2. The seat belt must be adjusted to the

correct position.

CAUTION:o The sensor that activates the SRS airbag

is connected with the pre-tensioner seatbelts. The SRS airbag warning light onthe instrument panel will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds after the igni-tion key has been turned to the "ON"position, and then it should turn off.

o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not work-ing properly, this warning light will illu-minate even if there is no malfunction ofthe SRS airbag system. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to "ON" or if itremains illuminated after approximately6 seconds, or if it illuminates while thevehicle is being driven, please have anauthorized Hyundai dealer inspect thepre-tensioner seat belts and SRS airbagsystem as soon as possible.

!

AIRBAG

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consistsmainly of the following components.

Their locations are shown in the illustration.

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module

Driver's airbag

B180B01GK2

3

Passenger'sairbag

1

Page 37: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

26

!

NOTE:o Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the frontof the sun visor and in the glove box.

o If you are considering modification ofyour vehicle due to a disability, pleasecontact the Hyundai Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-633-5151.

WARNING:o As its name implies, the SRS is designed

to work with, and be supplemental to,the driver's and the passenger's threepoint seat belt systems and is not asubstitute for them. Therefore, your seatbelts must be worn at all times while thevehicle is in motion. The airbags deployonly in certain frontal impact conditionssevere enough to cause significant in-jury to the vehicle occupants.

o The SRS is designed to deploy theairbags only when an impact is suffi-ciently severe and when the impact angleis less than 30° from the forward longi-tudinal axis of the vehicle and will notdeploy in side, rear or rollover impacts.Additionally, the airbags will only de-ploy once. Thus, seat belts must be wornat all times.

o Front airbags are not intended to deployin light collisions in which protectioncan be provided by the seat belt alone.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT(AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)

B240A02GK-GAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with a SupplementalRestraint (Airbag) System. The indications ofthe system's presence are the letters "SRS AIRBAG" embossed on the ornament in the steer-ing wheel and the passenger's side front panelpad above the glove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installedunder the pad covers in the center of thesteering wheel and the passenger's side frontpanel above the glove box. The purpose of theSRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or thefront passenger with additional protection thanthat offered by the seat belt system alone, incase of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.

B240A01GK

Driver's Airbag! WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate

only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced.All seat belts, of any type, should alwaysbe replaced after they have been wornduring a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt assemblymechanisms become hot during activa-tion. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies for several minutes afterthey have been activated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or replace thepre-tensioner seat belts yourself. Thismust be done by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat beltassemblies.

o Do not attempt to service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt system in anymanner.

o Improper handling of the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies, and failure to heedthe warnings to not strike, modify, in-spect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may leadto improper operation or inadvertentactivation and serious injury.

o Always wear seat belts when driving orriding in a motor vehicle.

Page 38: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

27

o No objects should be placed over or nearthe airbag modules on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, and the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to deploy.

o If the airbags deploy, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring, or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental firing of the airbags orby rendering the SRS inoperative.

o Do not install a child restraint system inthe front passenger seat position. Achild restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat. The infant orchild could be severely injured or killedby an airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Do not allow children to ride in the frontpassenger seat. If older children (teen-agers and older) must ride in the frontseat, make sure they are always properlybelted and that the seat is moved back asfar as possible.

! WARNING: !o For maximum safety protection in all

types of crashes, all occupants includ-ing the driver should always wear theirseat belts whether or not an airbag isalso provided at their seating position tominimize the risk of severe injury ordeath in the event of a crash. Do not sitor lean unnecessarily close to the airbagwhile the vehicle is in motion.

o The SRS airbag system must deploy veryrapidly to provide protection in a crash.If an occupant is out of position becauseof not wearing a seat belt, the airbag mayforcefully contact the occupant causingserious or fatal injuries.

WARNING:!

o Front airbags are not intended to deployin side-impact, rear-impact or rollovercrashes. In addition, airbags will notdeploy in frontal crashes below the de-ployment threshold speed.

o The driver should sit back as far aspossible while still maintaining controlof the vehicle. If you are sitting too closeto the airbag, it can cause death or seri-ous injury when it inflates.

WARNING:

Rear impact

B240A02GK

Side ImpactRollover

Page 39: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

28

B240B03GK-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following components:

- Driver's Airbag Module- Passenger's Airbag Module- Knee Bolster- SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)- SRS Control Module (SRSCM)

The SRSCM continually monitors all elementswhile the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontalor near-frontal impact is severe enough torequire airbag deployment.

B240B01L A fully inflated airbag in combination with aproperly worn seat belt slows the driver's or thepassenger's forward motion, thus reducing therisk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediatelystarts deflating, enabling the driver to maintainforward visibility.

B240B03L

B240B02L

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) onthe instrument panel will illuminate for about 6seconds after the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position or after the engine is started, afterwhich the SRI should go out.

The airbag modules are located both in thecenter of the steering wheel and in the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box. Whenthe SRSCM detects a considerable impact tothe front of the vehicle, it will automaticallydeploy the airbags.

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directlyinto the pad covers will separate under pres-sure from the expansion of the airbags. Furtheropening of the covers then allows full inflation ofthe airbags.

Page 40: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

29

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid airfreshener inside a vehicle, do not place itnear the instrument cluster nor on the in-strument panel pad surface. If there is anyleakage from the air freshener onto theseareas (instrument cluster, instrument panelpad or air ventilator), it may damage theseparts. If the liquid from the air freshenerdoes leak onto these areas, wash them withwater immediately.

!Passanger's Airbag

B240B01GK

!

B240B05L

WARNING:o When the SRS is activated, there may be

a loud noise and fine dust will be re-leased throughout the vehicle. Theseconditions are normal and are not haz-ardous. However, the fine dust gener-ated during airbag deployment maycause skin irritation. Wash your handsand face thoroughly with lukewarm waterand a mild soap after an accident inwhich the airbags were deployed.

o The SRS can function only when theignition key is in the "ON" position. If theSRS SRI does not illuminute, or contin-uously remains on after illuminating forabout 6 seconds when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, or afterthe engine is started, illuminates whiledriving, the SRS is not working properly.If this occurs, have your vehicle immedi-ately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

o Before you replace a fuse or disconnecta battery terminal, turn the ignition keyto the "LOCK" position or remove theignition key. Never remove or replace theair bag related fuse(s) when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. Failure toheed this warning will cause the SRS SRIto illuminate.

! CAUTION:Do not install or place any accessories(drink holder, cassette holder, sticker, etc)on the front passenger's panel above theglove box in a vehicle with a passenger's airbag. Such objects may become dangerousprojectiles and cause injury if thepassenger's air bag inflates.

Passanger's Airbag

Page 41: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

30

B990B04Y-AAT

Side Impact Airbag (If installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impactairbag in each front seat. The purpose of theairbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/orthe front passenger with additional protectionthan that offered by the seat belt alone. The sideimpact airbags are designed to deploy onlyduring certain side-impact collisions, depend-ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and pointof impact. The side impact airbags are notdesigned to deploy in all side impact situations.

B990B02Y

!o Do not install any accessories on the

side or near the side impact airbag.o Do not use excessive force on the side of

the seat.o Do not place any objects over the airbag

or between the airbag and yourself.o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door and thefront seat. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause injuryif the supplemental side impact airbaginflates.

o To prevent unexpected deployment ofthe side impact airbag that may result inpersonal injury,avoid impact to the sideairbag sensor when the ignition key ison.

WARNING:! WARNING:o The side impact airbag is supplemental

to the driver's and the passenger's seatbelt systems and is not a substitute forthem. Therefore your seat belts must beworn at all times while the vehicle is inmotion. The airbags deploy only in cer-tain side impact conditions severeenough to cause significant injury to thevehicle occupants.

o For best protection from the side impactairbag system and to avoid being injuredby the deploying side impact airbag,both front seat occupants should sit inan upright position with the seat beltproperly fastened. The driver's handsshould be placed on the steering wheelat the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions.The passenger's arms and hands shouldbe placed on their laps.

o Do not use any accessory seat covers.o Use of seat covers could prevent or

reduce the effectiveness of the system.

Page 42: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

31

B240C03A-AAT

SRS Care

o The SRS is virtually maintenance free andthere are no parts you can safely service byyourself. If the SRS SRI (Service ReminderIndicator) does not illuminate, or continu-ously remains on, have your vehicle imme-diately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

o Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or any workon the steering wheel must be performed bya qualified Hyundai technician. Improperhandling of the airbag system may result inserious personal injury.

NOTE:Your vehicle's Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem Control Module is equipped a record-ing device which may record the use of theseat belt restraint system by the driver andfront passenger in certain collisions.

! WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint system in

the front passenger seat position. Achild restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat. The infant orchild could be severely injured or killedby an airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Modification to SRS components or wir-ing, including the addition of any kind ofbadges to the pad covers or modifica-tions to the body structure, can ad-versely affect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

B240C01HP

!o For cleaning the airbag pad covers, use

only a soft, dry cloth or one which hasbeen moistened with plain water. Sol-vents or cleaners could adversely affectthe airbag covers and proper deploy-ment of the system.

o No objects should be placed over or nearthe airbag modules on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, and the frontpassenger’s panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to inflate.

o If the airbags inflate, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring, or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental inflation of the airbagsor by rendering the SRS inoperative.

o If components of the airbag system mustbe discarded, or if the vehicle must bescrapped, certain safety precautionsmust be observed. Your Hyundai dealerknows these precautions and can giveyou the necessary information. Failureto follow these precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk of personalinjury.

WARNING:

Page 43: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

32

!o If you sell your vehicle, make certain that

this manual is transferred to the newowner.

o If your car was flooded and has soakedcarpeting or water on the floor, youshouldn't try to start the engine; havethe car towed to an authorized Hyundaidealer.

WARNING:

B240D01JM-AAT

Additional Safety Precautionso Never let passengers ride in the cargo

area (trunk) or on top of a folded-downback seat. All occupants should sit upright,fully back in their seats with their seat beltson and their feet on the floor.

o Passengers should not move out of orchange seats while the vehicle is mov-ing. A passenger who is not wearing a seatbelt during a crash or emergency stop canbe thrown against the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out of the ve-hicle.

o Each seat belt is designed to restrain oneoccupant. If more than one person uses thesame seat belt, they could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision.

o Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improve occu-pant comfort or reposition the seat belt canreduce the protection provided by the seatbelt and increase the chance of seriousinjury in a crash.

o Passengers should not place hard orsharp objects between themselves andthe airbags. Carrying hard or sharp objectson your lap or in your mouth can result ininjuries if an airbag inflates.

o Keep occupants away from the airbagcovers. All occupants should sit upright, fullyback in their seats with their seat belts on andtheir feet on the floor. If occupants are tooclose to the airbag covers, they could beinjured if the airbags inflate.

o Do not attach or place objects on or nearthe airbag covers. Any object attached toor placed on the front or side impact airbagcovers could interfere with the proper opera-tion of the airbags.

o Do not modify the front seats. Modifica-tion of the front seats could interfere with theoperation of the supplemental restraint sys-tem sensing components or side impactairbags.

o Do not place items under the front seats.Placing items under the front seats couldinterfere with the operation of the supple-mental restraint system sensing compo-nents and wiring harnesses.

o Never hold an infant or child on your lap.The infant or child could be seriously injuredor killed in the event of a crash. All infants andchildren should be properly restrained inappropriate child safety seats or seat beltsin the rear seat.

Page 44: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

33

WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position can

result in serious injury or death in acrash.

o Always sit upright, fully back in the seat,with your seat belt on, and your feet onthe floor.

Adding Equipment to or Modifying YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle.

If you modify your vehicle by changing yourvehicle's frame, bumper system, front end orside sheet metal or ride height, this may affectthe operation of your vehicle's airbag system.

!

Page 45: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

34 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260A02GK-AAT

B260A02GK-A

Page 46: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

35

1. Speedometer 2. Turn Signal Indicator Light 3. Odometer 4. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If installed) 5. Coolant Temperature Gauge 6. Trip odometer 7. Fuel Gauge 8. Tachometer 9. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light (If installed)10. Trip Odometer Reset Knob11. Charging System Warning Light12. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Service Reminder

Indicator (SRI)

13. Seat Belt Warning Light14. High Beam Indicator Light15. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light16. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)17. Low Fuel Warning Light18. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light19. CRUISE Indicator Light (If installed)20. CRUISE SET Indicator Light (If installed)21. Tail Gate Open Warning Light22. Door Ajar Warning Light23. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If installed)

Page 47: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

36

B260G01A-AAT

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

CAUTION:If the oil pressure warning light stays onwhile the engine is running, serious enginedamage may result. The oil pressure warn-ing light comes on whenever there is insuf-ficient oil pressure. In normal operation, itshould come on when the ignition switchis turned on, then go out when the engineis started. If the oil pressure warning lightstays on while the engine is running, thereis a serious malfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soon as it issafe to do so, turn off the engine and checkthe oil level. If the oil level is low, fill theengine oil to the proper level and start theengine again. If the light stays on with theengine running, turn the engine off imme-diately. In any instance where the oil lightstays on when the engine is running, theengine should be checked by a Hyundaidealer before the car is driven again.

!

!

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260P02Y-GAT

ABS Service Reminder Indica-tor (SRI) (If Installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, theAnti-Lock Brake System SRI will come on andthen go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRIremains on, comes on while driving, or does notcome on when the key is turned to the "ON"position, this indicates that there may be aproblem with the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checked byyour Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. Thenormal braking system will still be operational,but without the assistance of the anti-lock brakesystem.

WARNING:If the both ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON"or come on while driving, there may be aproblem with E.B.D (Electronic Brake ForceDistribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and haveyour vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The blinking green arrows on the instrumentpanel show the direction indicated by the turnsignals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink,blinks more rapidly than normal, or does notilluminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signalsystem is indicated. Your dealer should beconsulted for repairs.

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comes on when-ever the headlights are switched to the highbeam or flash position.

Page 48: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

37

B260H01GK-AAT

Parking Brake/Low Brake FluidLevel Warning Light

CAUITON:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer assoon as possible. Driving your car with aproblem in either the brake electrical sys-tem or brake hydraulic system is danger-ous, and could result in a serious injury ordeath.

Warning Light Operation

The parking brake/low brake fluid level warninglight should come on when the parking brake isapplied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON"or "START". After the engine is started, the lightshould go out in three seconds.If the parking brake is not applied, the warninglight should come on when the ignition switch isturned to "ON" or "START", then go out in threeseconds. If the light comes on at any other time,you should slow the vehicle and bring it to acomplete stop in a safe location off the roadway.

The brake fluid level warning light indicates thatthe brake fluid level in the brake master cylinderis low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should beadded. After adding fluid, if no other trouble isfound, the car should be immediately and care-fully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection.If further trouble is experienced, the vehicleshould not be driven at all but taken to a dealerby a professional towing service or some othersafe method.Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonalbraking systems. This means you still havebraking on two wheels even if one of the dualsystems should fail. With only one of the dualsystems working, more than normal pedal traveland greater pedal pressure are required to stopthe car. Also, the car will not stop in as short adistance with only half of the brake systemworking. If the brakes fail while you are driving,shift to a lower gear for additional engine brakingand stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

!

B260J01A-AAT

Charging System Warning Light

The charging system warning light should comeon when the ignition is turned on, then go outwhen the engine is running. If the light stays onwhile the engine is running, there is a malfunc-tion in the electrical charging system. If the lightcomes on while you are driving, stop, turn off theengine and check under the hood. First, makecertain the generator drive belt is in place. If it is,check the tension of the belt. Do this as shownon page 6-23 by pushing down on the center ofthe belt. Have the system checked by yourHyundai dealer as soon as possible.

Page 49: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

38

B260E01L-AAT

Seat Belt Reminder Light AndChime

Seat belt reminder light comes and stays on untilthe seat belt is fastened when the ignition key isturned "ON" or "START".And, the warning chime will also sound for about6 seconds.

B260K01F-AAT

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

This light remains on unless the tail gate iscompletely closed and latched.

B260M01A-AAT

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

The low fuel level warning light comes on whenthe fuel tank is approaching empty. When itcomes on, you should add fuel as soon aspossible. Driving with the fuel level warning lighton or with the fuel level below "E" can cause theengine to misfire and damage the catalyticconverter.

B260L02HP-GAT

Door Ajar Warning Light andChime (If Installed)

The door ajar warning light warns you that a dooris not completely closed and the chime warnsyou that the key is in the ignition switch.

NOTE :The warning chime only sounds wheneverthe key is in the ignition switch and thedriver's side front door is open simulta-neously. The chime sounds until the key isremoved from the ignition switch or thedriver's side front door is closed.

B260B01JM-AAT

SRS (Airbag) ServiceReminder Indicator (SRI)

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comeson for about 6 seconds after the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position or after the engineis started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS is notworking properly. If the SRI does not come on,or continuously remains on after coming on forabout 6 seconds when you turned the ignitionkey to the "ON" position or started the engine,or if it comes on while driving, have the SRSinspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.

B260N02A-AAT

Malfunction IndicatorLight

This light illuminates when there is a malfunctionof an exhaust gas related component, and thesystem is not functioning properly so that theexhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied.This light will also illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, and then it will goout in a few seconds after the engine is started.If it illuminates while driving, or does not illumi-nate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, take your car to your nearest autho-rized Hyundai dealer and have the systemchecked.

Page 50: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

39

B260Q01E-GAT

CRUISE Indicator Light(If Installed)

The cruise indicator light in the instrument clus-ter is illuminated when the cruise control mainswitch on the end of the barrel is pushed.The indicator light does not illuminate when thecruise control main switch is pushed a secondtime.Information about the use of cruise control isbeginning on page 1-63.

B270A01A-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SOUND

The front disc brake pads have wear indicatorsthat should make a high-pitched squealing orscraping noise when new pads are needed. Thesound may come and go or be heard all the timewhen the vehicle is moving. It may also be heardwhen the brake pedal is pushed down firmly.Excessive rotor damage will result if the wornpads are not replaced. See your Hyundai dealerimmediately.

B260R01E-GAT

CRUISE SET Indicator Light(If installed)

The set indicator light in the instrument clusteris illuminated when the cruise control switch ispushed downward to "SET (COAST)".The set indicator light does not illuminate whenthe control switch is in the "CANCEL" position.

B265C01LZ-AAT

Electronic StabilityProgram Indicator Lights(If installed)

The electronic stability program indicatorschange operation according to the ignition switchposition and whether the system is in operationor not.They will illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, but should go outafter three seconds. If the ESP or ESP-OFFindicator stays on, take your car to your autho-rized Hyundai dealer and have the systemchecked. See section 2 for more informationabout the ESP.

Page 51: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

40

!

B290A02A-AAT

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. The engine coolant is underpressure and could erupt and cause severeburns. Wait until the engine is cool beforeremoving the radiator cap.

The needle on the engine coolant temperaturegauge should stay in the normal range. If itmoves across the dial to "H" (Hot), pull over andstop as soon as possible and turn off the engine.Then open the hood and after the engine hascooled, check the coolant level and the waterpump drive belt. If you suspect cooling systemtrouble, have your cooling system checked bya Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.

B300A01A-AAT

SPEEDOMETER

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated inmiles per hour (on the outer scale) and kilome-ters per hour (on the inner scale).

HGK2060

HGK2058A

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

B280A01A-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

The needle on the gauge indicates the approxi-mate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacityis given in Section 9.

HGK2059

Page 52: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

41

!

B330A03E-AAT

TACHOMETER

The tachometer registers the speed of yourengine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

B330A01GK

CAUTION:The engine should not be raced to such aspeed that the needle enters the red zoneon the tachometer face. This can causesevere engine damage and may void yourwarranty.

B310B01GK-AAT

Odometer/Trip odometer

Function of digital odometer/trip odom-eterPushing in the reset switch on the right side ofspeedometer when the ignition switch is turned"ON" will display the following sequence:

HGK028B

Type A

Type B

HGK2061-1

HGK055C

Type A

Type B

Page 53: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

42

1. Odometer

The odometer records the total driving distancein miles, and is useful for keeping a record formaintenance intervals.

NOTE:Any alteration of the odometer may voidyour warranty coverage.

2,3 Trip odometer

Records the distance of 2 trips in miles.TRIP A: first distance you have traveled fromyour origination point to a first destination.TRIP B: Second distance from the first destina-tion to the final destination.

To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press the resetswitch. When pressed for 1 second, it will resetto 0.

TRIP COMPUTER

B400B02GK-GAT

(If installed)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-con-trolled driver information gauge that displaysinformation related to driving, such as estimateddistance to empty, average speed and drivetime on the LCD.

Reset Switch

o The reset switch is used to zero the multi-functional display mode.

o Pushing in the reset switch on the left side oftacometer changes the display as follows;

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

AVERAGE SPEED

DRIVE TIME

B400B01GK-E

Type A

Type B

Page 54: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

43

1. Distance to Empty

o This mode provides the estimated distanceto empty from the current fuel level in the fueltank.

o The trip computer may not register additionalfuel if less than 6 liters of fuel are added to thevehicle.

o When the battery has been reinstalled afterbeing discharged or disconnected, drivemore than 32km for an accurate distance toempty.

HGK2063

Type A

Type B

NOTE:o When the distance to empty is less than

50 km, the symbol will always come onand the distance to empty digits willindicate "---" with flash until more fuelis added.

o The distance to empty can differ fromthe actual tripmeter according to drivingconditions.

o The distance to empty can vary accord-ing to the driving conditions, drivingpattern or vehicle speed.

B400B02GK-E

Type A

Type B

2. AVERAGE SPEED

o This mode indicates the average speedtravelled since the last average speed reset.

o To reset the average speed to zero, pressand hold the reset switch for more than 1second while the average speed is beingdisplayed.

Page 55: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

44 MULTI GAUGE

B330C01GK-GAT

(If installed)

Multi gauge is consists of torque gauge, instan-taneous fuel consumption gauge and volt gauge.

B330C01GK

Torque gauge

It shows instantaneous change of the torque byrpm.

Instantaneous fuel Consumption gauge

It shows instantaneous fuel consumption ac-cording to the driving condition. The more indi-cated figure is low, the more it indicates efficientdriving situation.

B330C04GK

3. DRIVE TIME

o This mode indicates the drive time travelledsince the last drive time reset.

o To reset the drive time to zero, press andhold the reset switch for more than 1 secondwhile the drive time is being displayed.

HGK2065

Type A

Type B

Page 56: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

45

Volt gauge

It shows moment volt change and makes fordiver correspond to low volt situation.

B330C03GK

MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAMSWITCHTurn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turnsignals on the left side of the car to blink. Pushingupwards on the lever causes the turn signals onthe right side of the car to blink. As the turn iscompleted, the lever will automatically return tothe center position and turn off the turn signalsat the same time. If either turn signal indicatorlight blinks more rapidly than usual, goes on butdoes not blink, or does not go on at all, there isa malfunction in the system. Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer.

B340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up ordown to a point where it begins flashing.The lever will automatically return to the centerposition when released.

HGK2079

Page 57: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

46

Parking light auto cut

If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF" afterdriving, the parking lights will automatically shut"OFF" when the driver's door is opened.To turn them "ON" again you must simply turnthe ignition key to the "ON" position.

B340D01A-AAT

High-beam Switch

To turn on the headlight high beams, push thelever forward (away from you). The high beamindicator light will come on at the same time. Forlow beams, pull the lever back toward you.

B340G01LZ-GAT

Auto Light (If installed)

To operate the automatic light feature, turn thebarrel on the end of the multi-function switch. Ifyou set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", thetail lights and headlights will be turned automati-cally on or off according to external illumination.

NOTE:Switch on car light manually in foggy, cloudyand rainy conditions.

HGK2075

B340C03E-AAT

Headlight Switch

To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on theend of the multi-function switch. The first posi-tion turns on the parking lights, sidelights, taillights and instrument panel lights. The secondposition turns on the headlights.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlight.

HGK2074

Page 58: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

47

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the switch levertoward you, then release it. The headlights canbe flashed even though the headlight switch isin the "OFF" position.

HGK2077NOTE:o Never place anything over sensor lo-

cated on the instrument panel, this willensure better auto light system control.

o Don't clean the sensor using a windowcleaner.

o If your vehicle has window tint or othertypes of coating on the front windshield,the AUTO light system may not workproperly.

B340G01GK

Auto Light Sensor

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH

B350A01A-AAT

The windshield wiper switch has three posi-tions:

(1) Intermittent wiper operation(2)Low-speed operation(3)High-speed operation

NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system, donot attempt to wipe away heavy accumula-tions of snow or ice. Accumulated snowand ice should be removed manually. Ifthere is only a light layer of snow or ice,operate the heater in the defrost mode tomelt the snow or ice before using the wiper.

HGK042A

Page 59: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

48

B350B01O-AAT

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel. Whenthe washer lever is operated, the wipers auto-matically make two passes across the wind-shield. The washer continues to operate untilthe lever is released.

NOTE:o Do not operate the washer more than 15

seconds at a time or when the fluidreservoir is empty.

o In icy or freezing weather, be sure thewiper blades are not frozen to the glassprior to operating the wipers.

o In areas where water freezes in winter,use windshield washer antifreeze.

HGK044A

B350C01S-AAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation

To use the intermittent wiper feature, place thewiper switch in the "INT" position. With theswitch in this position, the interval betweenwipes can be varied from 2 to 10 seconds byturning the interval adjuster barrel.

HGK043AHGK045A

Mist Wiper Operation

If a single wipe is desired in mist, move thewindshield wiper and washer control lever up.

Page 60: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

49

B390A01E-AAT

Rear Window Wiper And Washer Switch

1. : The rear window wiper starts to oper-ate three times after the washer fluidsprays onto the rear window.

2.OFF3.INT : The interval between wipes operates

every 5 seconds intermittently.4.ON : The rear window wiper starts to oper-

ate continuously.5. : The washer fluid will be sprayed onto

the rear window and the wiper operateswhile the rear window wiper barrel isplaced in this position.

HGK046A

Do not operate the washer continuously formore than 15 seconds or when the fluid reser-voir is empty; this could damage the system. Donot operate the wiper when the window is dry;this can result in scratching as well as prema-ture wiper blade wear.For the reason stated above,do not operate thewasher when the washer fluid reservoir isempty.

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

B360A04A-AAT

(If Installed)

To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch.They will light when the headlight switch is in thesecond position and the ignition key is in the"ON" position.

NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams, thefront fog lights will be turned off.

HGK142A

Page 61: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

50 REAR WINDOW DEFROSTERSWITCH

HGK2090-1

B380A01A-AAT

The rear window defroster and heated outsiderearview mirrors are turned on by pushing in theswitch. To turn the defroster off, push the switcha second time. The rear window defrosterautomatically turns itself off after about 15 min-utes. To restart the defroster cycle, push in theswitch again after it has turned itself off.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionfor the rear window defroster to operate.

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the rearwindow glass with an abrasive type of glasscleaner or use a scraper to remove foreigndeposits from the inner surface of the glassas this may cause damage to the defrosterelements.

!

Type A

Type B

HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM

B370A01A-AAT

The hazard warning system should be usedwhenever you find it necessary to stop the carin a hazardous location. When you must makesuch an emergency stop, always pull off theroad as far as possible.The hazard warning lights are turned on bypushing in the hazard switch. This causes allturn signal lights to blink. The hazard warninglights will operate even though the key is not inthe ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off, push theswitch a second time.

HGK140A

Page 62: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

51CIGARETTE LIGHTERINSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTCONTROL (RHEOSTAT)

B410A01A-AAT

The instrument panel lights can be made brighteror dimmer by turning the instrument panel lightcontrol knob.

HGK2150

B420A02A-AAT

For the cigarette lighter to work, the key mustbe in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the wayinto its socket. When the element has heated,the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. Thiscan damage the heating element and create afire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter,use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or itsapproved equivalent.

HGK2118

DIGITAL CLOCK

B400A01A-AAT

There are three control buttons for the digitalclock. Their functions are:

HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-cated.

MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indi-cated.

RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" tofacilitate resetting the clock to thecorrect time. When this is done:

Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29changes the readout to 11 : 00.Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29changes the readout to 12 : 00.

HGK143A

! CAUTION:Do not use electric accessories or equip-ment other than the Hyundai genuine partsin the socket.

Page 63: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

52 DRINK HOLDER

!B450A02GK-AAT

(If Installed)

The drink holder is used for holding cups orcans.To use the passenger's drink holder, push thedrink holder.

HGK2123

WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink hold-

ers. A spilled beverage that is very hotcan injure you or your passengers. Spilledliquids can damage interior trim andelectrical components.

o Do not place objects other than cups orcans in the drink holder. Such objectscan be thrown out in the event of asudden stop or an accident, possiblyinjuring the passengers in the vehicle.

ASHTRAY

B430A01GK-AAT

The front ashtray may be opened by pushingand releasing the ashtray door at its top edge.To remove the ashtray in order to clean it, themetal ash receptacle should be lifted out fromthe ashtray door. Do not attempt to remove theentire ashtray door assembly or damage willresult. To reinstall it, place it in the properposition and press it down in the ashtray door.The ashtray lamp will only illuminate when theexterior body lights are switched on.

HGK2120

Driver's Passenger's

Page 64: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

53

! WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone’s hands,

arms or body are between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash, as this couldresult in injury.

o Do not place your head or arms out of thesunroof opening at any time.

CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold

temperature or when it is covered withice or snow.

o Periodically remove any dirt that mayhave accumulated on the guide rails.

!

SUNROOF

B460A01S-AAT

(If Installed)

The sunroof can be operated with the ignitionkey in the "ON" position.

!

SUNSHADE

B470A01S-AAT

(If Installed)

The sunshade can be opened and closed bysliding it forward or rearward when the sunroofis closed. The sunshade will open automaticallywhen the sunroof is opened, but it must beclosed manually.

HGK2026

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while driving.

B460B02GK-GAT

Opening the Sunroof System

The sunroof can be electrically opened or closedwith the ignition key in the "ON" position. Thesunroof is moved to its fully open position bypushing the " " switch, and to stop at the desiredposition, push in any switches ( , , Up, Down).To close, press and hold the " " button.Release the button when the sunroof reachesthe desired position.

HGK2022

Page 65: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

54

2. Insert the hexagonal head wrench providedwith the vehicle into the socket. This wrenchcan be found in the vehicle’s trunk or glovebox.

3. Push and turn the wrench clockwise to closeor counterclockwise to open the sunroof.

HGK2025

B460C01S-AAT

Tilting the Sunroof System

The sunroof can be tilted by pushing the "UP"button with the sunroof closed. Release thebutton when the sunroof reaches the desiredposition. To close the sunroof, press the"DOWN" button.

NOTE:After washing the car or after there is rain,be sure to wipe off any water that is on thesunroof before operating it.

HGK2023

B460D03GK-AAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof

If the sunroof does not electrically operate:

1. Remove the cap located in the rear roofpanel by using a coin or screw driver.

HGK2024

Page 66: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

55

HGK2087

B460E03GK-GAT

Resetting the Sunroof System

If the battery has been recharged, discon-nected or is manually with operating the hex-agonal head wrench, you may need to reset thesunroof.

To do this;1. Turn the ignition switch "OFF".2. With pressing " " "up" button at the same

time, turn the ignition switch "ON".

The resetting is failed when the ignitionkey to the "OFF" within 1.5 seconds.

3. If the sunroof is set like this, the sunroof isreset with tilting up/down automatically oncefor all.

CAUTION:If the sunroof is not reset, it may not operatenormally.

!

INTERIOR LIGHT

B480A01GK-GAT

MAP LIGHT

(1) Push in the map light switch to turn on thedriver side light.

(2) In the "DOOR" position, the interior cour-tesy light comes on when any door isopened regardless of the ignition key posi-tion. The light goes out gradually 6 secondsafter the door is closed.

(3) Push in the map light switch to turn on thedriver side light.

(1) (2)

(3)

SPECTACLE CASE

!

B491A01F-AAT

The spectacle case is located on the frontoverhead console.Push the end of the cover to open or close thespectacle case.

HGK2122

WARNING:Do not open the spectacle case while thevehicle is moving.The rear view mirror of the vehicle can beblocked by an open spectacle case.

Page 67: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

56

!

2. Next, adjust the mirror angle by depressingthe appropriate perimeter switch as illus-trated.

CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continuously

for an unnecessary length of time.o Scraping ice from the mirror face could

cause permanent damage. To removeany ice, use a sponge, soft cloth orapproved deicer.

WARNING:Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passengerside rear view mirror. It is a convex mirrorwith a curved surface. Any objects seen inthis mirror are closer than they appear.

!

GLOVE BOX MIRROR

B510B01A-AAT

OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORElectric Type

HGK2053

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjustedto your preferred rear vision, both directly be-hind the vehicle, and to the rear of the left andright sides.The remote control outside rearview mirrorswitch controls the adjustments for both theright and left outside mirror.

To adjust the position of either mirror:

1. Move the selecting switch to the right or leftto activate the adjustable mechanism for thecorresponding door mirror.

!

B500A01A-AAT

WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the glove boxdoor should be kept closed when the car isin motion.

HGK2121

o To open the glove box, pull on the glove boxrelease lever.

Page 68: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

57DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REAR VIEWMIRROR

B510D01Y-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER(If Installed)

The outside rearview mirror heater is actuatedin connection with the rear window defroster. Toheat the outside rearview mirror glass, push inthe switch for the rear window defroster. Therearview mirror glass will be heated for defrost-ing or defogging and will give you improved rearvision in inclement weather conditions. Push theswitch again to turn the heater off. The outsiderearview mirror heater automatically turns itselfoff after 15 minutes.

HGK2090-1

Type A

Type B

!

B510C01A-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REAR VIEWMIRRORS

To fold the outside rear view mirrors, push themtoward the rear.The outside rear view mirrors can be foldedrearward for parking in narrow areas.

HGK2055

WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rear viewmirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and an acci-dent which could cause death, serious in-jury or death.

B520A01A-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night insiderear view mirror. The "night" position is selectedby flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirrortoward you. In the "night" position, the glare ofheadlights of cars behind you is reduced.

HGK2052

Page 69: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

58 HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT

B550A01S-GAT

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplightson either side of the car, the high mounted rearstoplight in the center of the rear window orinserted in the rear spoiler also lights when thebrakes are applied.

B550A02GK

Type A Type B Type C

PARKING BRAKE

B530A01A-AAT

Always engage the parking brake before leav-ing the car. This also turns on the parking brakeindicator light when the key is in the "ON" or"START" position. Before driving away, be surethat the parking brake is fully released and theindicator light is off.

o To engage the parking brake, pull the leverup as far as possible.

o To release the parking brake, pull up thelever and press the thumb button. Then,while holding the button in, lower the brakelever.

HGK3019

B520B02O-GAT

(Electric type) (If installed)

The electric type day/night inside rearview mir-ror automatically controls the glare of headlightsof the car behind you.

1. Pressing the button turns the auto-dimming function OFF which is indicated bythe green Status Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns the auto-dimming function ON which is indicated bythe green Status Indicator LED turning on.

NOTE:The mirror defaults to the "ON" positioneach time the vehicle is started.

HLZ2068-1

Page 70: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

59FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNINGLIGHT

B620A01S-AAT

A red light comes on when the front door isopened. The purpose of this light is to assistwhen you get in or out and also to warn passingvehicles.

B620A01GK

!

HOOD RELEASE

B570A01GK-GAT

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the hood.

HGK2019

2. Press the safety hook lever up and lift thehood.

3. Raise the hood by hand.

When closing the hood, slowly close the hoodand make sure it locks into place.

HGK2020

WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that the

hood is firmly latched before drivingaway. If it is not latched, the hood couldopen while the vehicle is being driven,causing a total loss of visibility, whichmight result in an accident.

o Do not move the vehicle with the hoodin the raised position, as vision is ob-structed and the hood could fall or bedamaged.

Hood Release Lever

Page 71: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

60

WARNING:o The fuel cap must be tightened until cap

clicks, otherwise " " light willilluminate.

o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Beforerefueling, always stop the engine andnever allow sparks or open flames nearthe filler area. If you need to replace thefiller cap, use a genuine Hyundai re-placement part.

o If you open the fuel filler cap during highambient temperatures, a slight "pres-sure sound" may be heard. This is nor-mal and not a cause for concern.Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,turn it slowly.

o Make sure the fuel filler cap is replacedand securely seated after fueling. Failureto replace or fully seat the fuel filler capwill result in fuel vapors escaping intothe atmosphere and the MIL indicatorilluminating.

o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzleshut off when refueling.

o Automotive fuels are flammable/explo-sive materials. When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelines carefully.

!

NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open because icehas formed around it, tap lightly or push onthe lid to break the ice and release the lid. Donot pry on the lid. If necessary, spray aroundthe lid with an approved deicer fluid (do notuse radiator anti-freeze) or move the ve-hicle to a warm place and allow the ice tomelt.

HGK2018Q

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LIDRELEASE

B560A02JM-AAT

The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside thevehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid openerlocated on the front floor area on the left side ofthe vehicle.

HGK2017

Page 72: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

61

o Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuelfiller cap, have one's hands in contactwith metal parts away from the filler neckto discharge static electricity.

o Do not get back in the vehicle whilerefueling. Do not operate anything thatcan produce static electricity. Static elec-tricity discharge can ignite fuel vaporsresulting in explosion.

o When using a portable fuel container besure to place the container on the groundwhile refueling. Static electricity dis-charge from the container can ignite fuelvapors causing a fire. While starting re-fueling contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

o Do not use cellular phones around a gasstation. The electric current or electronicinterference from cellular phones canignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

o When refueling always shut the engineoff. Sparks by electrical equipment ofthe engine can ignite fuel vapors caus-ing a fire. After refueling, check to makesure the fuel filler cap is securely closed,and then start the engine.

o Do not smoke or try to light cigarettesaround a gas station. Automotive fuelsare flammable.

!

TAIL GATE

B540A01F-AAT

Remote Tail Gate Release

To open the tail gate without using the key, pullup the lid release lever located on the driver'sdoor panel.To close, lower the tail gate, then press down onit until it locks. To be sure the tail gate is securelyfastened, always try to pull it up again.

HGK2012

WARNING:The tail gate should always be kept com-pletely closed while the vehicle is in motion.If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaustgases may enter the car resulting in seriousillness or death to the occupants. See addi-tional warnings concerning exhaust gaseson page 2-2.

Page 73: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

62

! WARNING:Do not close an open tailgate (rear hatch)while a person(s) is sitting upright on therear seat. The tailgate or tailgate glass maycontact the head of a person sitting uprighton the rear seat. Closing the tailgate onto aperson's head may cause serious injuries,including death.

B540D01GK-GAT

when you close the tailgate

HGK1034

HGK227

B540C01F-AAT

To Unlock Using the Key

To open the tail gate, insert the key and turn itclockwise to unlock. The tail gate compartmentlight illuminates when the tail gate is opened.

HGK2011

Page 74: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

63

!

STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER

B600A01HP-AAT

(If installed)

To adjust the steering wheel:1. Pull the lever toward you and hold it to unlock.2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the

desired position.3. After adjustment, release the lever.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheelwhile driving as this may result in loss ofcontrol of the vehicle and serious injury ordeath.

HGK2049

!

B580A02A-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to givethe driver and front passenger either frontal orsideward shade. To reduce glare or to shut outdirect rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down.A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the sunvisor for the front passenger.

NOTE:The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)label containing useful information can befound on the front of each sun visor.

Vanity mirror

HGK2119

SUN VISOR

WARNING:Do not place the sun visor in such a mannerthat it obscures visibility of the roadway,traffic or other objects.

HORN

Working Zone

B610A01S-GAT

Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound thehorn.

HGK2050

Page 75: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

64

! WARNING:o Make sure the floor mat is properly placed

on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slipsand interferes with the movement of thepedals during driving, it may cause anaccident.

o Don't put an additional floor mat on thetop of the anchored mat, otherwise theadditional mat may slide forward andinterfere with the movement of the ped-als.

B990A03Y-AAT

Floor Mat Anchor

When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet,make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor inyour vehicle. This keeps the floor mat fromsliding forward.

HGK129

!

LUGGAGE NET

B540D02HP-GAT

(if installed)

Some objects can be kept in the net in theluggage compartment.Use the luggage net on the floor(If installed) orat the back of the luggage compartment toprevent objects from sliding.

WARNING:Avoid eye injury. Do not overstretch. Al-ways keep face and body out of recoil path.Do not use when strap has visible signs ofwear or damage.

HGK2126

Type B

CAUTION:To prevent damage to the goods or thevehicle, care should be taken when carryingfragile or bulky objects in the luggage com-partment.

!

Type A

Page 76: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

65CRUISE CONTROL

B660A01S-AAT

(If Installed)

The cruise control system provides automaticspeed control for your comfort when driving onfreeways, tollroads, or other noncongestedhighways. This system is designed to functionabove approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

B660A01GK

B660B01GK-AAT

To Set the Cruise Speed

1. Push in the cruise control main switch on theend of the barrel. The "CRUISE" indicatorlight in the instrument cluster will be illumi-nated. This turns the system on.

2. Accelerate to the desired cruising speedabove 25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Push the control switch downward to "SET(COAST)" and release it.The "SET" indicator light in the instrumentcluster will illuminate.

4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedaland the desired speed will automatically bemaintained.

B660B01GK

!

5. To momently increase speed, depress theaccelerator pedal enough for the vehicle toexceed the preset speed. When you removeyour foot from the accelerator pedal, thevehicle will return to the speed you have set.

WARNING:To avoid accidental cruise control engage-ment, keep the cruise control main switchoff when not using the cruise control.

Page 77: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

66

B660E01E-AAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed

1. Push the control switch upward to "RE-SUME (ACCEL)" position and hold it.

2. Accelerate to desired speed and release thecontrol switch. While the control switch isheld, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.

B660F02E-AAT

To Reset at a Slower Speed

1. Push the control switch downward to "SET(COAST)" and hold it. The vehicle will decel-erate.

2. When the desired speed is obtained, releasethe control switch. While the control switchis pushed, the vehicle speed will graduallydecrease.

B660B01GK

B660D01E-AAT

To Resume the Preset Speed

The vehicle will automatically resume the speedset prior to cancellation when you push thecontrol switch upward to "RESUME (ACCEL)"position and release it, providing the vehiclespeed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).

B660D01GK

B660C01GK-AAT

To Cancel the Cruise Speed

To disengage the cruise control system, pull thecontrol switch toward the steering wheel to"CANCEL" position.Additionally, the following actions will disengagethe system :

o Depress the brake pedal.o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual transaxle).o Shift the selector lever to "N" position (Auto-

matic transaxle).o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the

memorized speed by 9 mph (15 km/h).o Decrease the vehicle speed to less than 25

mph (40 km/h).o Release the main switch.

B660C01GK

Page 78: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

67

!! WARNING:o Keep the main switch off when not using

the cruise control.o Use the cruise control system only when

traveling on open highways in goodweather.

o Do not use the cruise control when itmay not be safe to keep the car at aconstant speed, for instance, driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slippery(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or windingroads or over 6% up-hill or down-hillroads.

o Pay particular attention to the drivingconditions whenever using the cruisecontrol system.

o During cruise-control driving with amanual transaxle vehicle, do not shiftinto neutral without depressing theclutch pedal, or the engine will beoverrevved. If this happens, depress theclutch pedal or release the main switch.

o With the cruise control engaged, whenthe brake pedal is applied, it is normal tohear the cruise control system deacti-vate. This is an indication of normalsystem operation.

o During normal cruise control operation,when the "SET(COAST)" is activated orreactivated after applying the brakes,the cruise control will energize afterapproximately 3 seconds. This delay isnormal.

WARNING:

AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLSWITCH

B610A01GK-GAT

(If installed)

The steering wheel audio remote control switchis installed to promote safe driving.

POWER ON/OFF Switch

Press the POWER ON/OFF switch to selectRadio, Tape, CD (compact disc) and CDC(compact disc changer).

Press the POWER ON/OFF switch once againto cancel Radio, Tape, CD (compact disc) andCDC (compact disc changer).

B610A01GK

Page 79: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

68

SEEK (UP / ) Switch

Press the SEEK UP ( ) switch 1 sec. or more.

1. RADIO mode

When the SEEK UP ( ) switch is pressed, theunit will automatically tune to the next higherfrequency.

2. TAPE mode

Pressing the SEEK UP ( ) switch will play thebeginning of the next music segment.

3. CD (compact disc)/CDC(compact disc changer) mode

Press the SEEK UP ( ) switch once to skipforward to the beginning of the next track.

VOL ( / ) Switch

o Press the VOL ( ) button to increasevolume.

o Press the VOL ( ) button to deceasevolume.

Page 80: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

69HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A02GK-GAT

1. Side Defrost Nozzle2. Side Ventilator3. Windshield Defrost Nozzle4. Center Ventilator HGK0003-1

B710B02O-AAT

CENTER VENTILATOR

The center ventilators are located in the middleof the dashboard. To change the direction of theair flow, move the knob in the center of the ventup-and-down and side-to-side. The vents areopened when the vent knob is moved to " "position. The vents are closed when the ventknob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clearof any obstructions.

B710C01JM-AAT

SIDE VENTILATOR

The side ventilators are located on each side ofthe dash board. To change the direction of theair flow, move the knob in the center of the ventup-and-down and side-to-side. The vents areopened when the vent knob is moved to " "position. The vents are closed when the ventknob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clearof any obstructions.

Page 81: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

70 HEATING AND VENTILATION

B670A01GK-GAT

Rotary Type

1. Air Conditioning switch2. Air intake control switch3. Rear window defroster switch4. Air flow control switch5. Fan speed control switch6. Temperature control switch

HGK002-3

B670B02A-AAT

Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)

This is used to turn the blower fan on or off andto select the fan speed.This blower fan speed, and therefore the vol-ume of air delivered from the system, may becontrolled manually by setting the blower con-trol between the "1" and "4" positions. The "0"position turns the blower fan off.

NOTE:If the blower fan is off, the air intake controlis set to the fresh mode automatically.

HGK2093

B670E02A-AAT

Temperature Control

This control is used to adjust the degree ofheating or cooling desired.

Cool

HGK2092

Warm

Page 82: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

71

B670D04GK-AAT

Air Flow Control

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can bedirected to the floor, instrument panel outlets, orwindshield. Five symbols are used to representFace, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and De-frost air position. The MAX A/C mode is used tocool the inside of the vehicle faster.

HGK005-1

B670C01GK-AAT

Air Intake Control

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculating inside air.To change the air intake control mode, (Freshmode, Recirculation mode) push the controlbutton.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light onthe button goes off when the air intake controlis fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ): The indicatorlight on the button is illuminated when the airintake control is recirculation mode.

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters thevehicle from the outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air fromwithin the passenger compartment will be drawnthrough the heating system and heated orcooled according to the function selected.

NOTE:o It should be noted that prolonged opera-

tion of the heating system in "Recircula-tion" mode will give rise to fogging of thewindshield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition, prolongeduse of the air conditioning with the "Re-circulation" mode selected may result inthe air within the passenger compart-ment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control will change to"Fresh" mode in floor, floor-defrost anddefrost position. This is normal opera-tion. But, the air intake control switchwill change to " " mode when theignition switch is turned "ON" with theMAX A/C mode selected.

HGK2100

Page 83: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

72

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to bedischarged through the side and center venti-lators.

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the dash vents and thefloor vents.

HGK2095 HGK2096

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents, wind-shield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle,side ventilator.If the "Floor" mode is selected, the "Fresh"mode will be activated.

HGK2097

Page 84: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

73

MAX A/C-Level

Air is discharged through the face level vents.If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/C willturn on automatically and "Recirculation" modewill be activated.

HGK021-1

MAXA/C

mode except the defrost mode and thefloor-defrost mode. Although the A/Cswitch indicator is turned off, this is normaloperation.

Defrost-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield defrostnozzle, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator.If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C willturn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will beactivated.

NOTE:If the "Floor-Defrost" or "Defrost" mode isselected, the air conditioning will not turnoff by pushing the A/C button.If the air flow control is set to the defrost orthe floor-defrost mode, the A/C will be onautomatically and the A/C will not off untilthe air flow control is set to the another

HGK2099

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the windshield defrostnozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle,side ventilator.If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/Cwill be turn on automatically and "Fresh" modewill be activated.

HGK2098

Page 85: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

74 HEATING CONTROLS

B690A02S-AAT

For normal heating operation, set the air intakecontrol to the "Fresh" position and the air flowcontrol to "Floor".

For faster heating, the air intake control shouldbe in the "Recirculation" position.

If the windows fog up, move the air flow controlto the "Def" (defroster) position. (The A/C willturn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

For maximum heat, rotate the temperaturecontrol to the farthest right position.

B690A01GK-A

* The A/C or the air intake control switch returnto its former setting.

A/C

ON

ON or OFF *

ON or OFF *

ON

ON

NOTE:o The air intake control switch will change

to " " mode when the ignition switchis turned "ON" with the MAX A/C modeselected.

o When you change to another mode fromMAX A/C, the A/C and the air intakecontrol switch are set to the followingchart.

Air Intake

Control Switch

or *

BI-LEVEL HEATING

B700A02E-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heatingcontrols. To use this feature:

o Set the air intake control to the fresh air ( )position.

o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( )position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

B700A01GK-A

Page 86: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

75

To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:

o Set the side vent control to " ", to shut offoutside air entry.

o Turn on the fan control switch.o Turn on the air conditioning switch by push-

ing in on the switch. The air conditioningindicator light should come on at the sametime.

o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode( ).

B710A01GK-A

VENTILATION

B710A01S-AAT

To operate the ventilation system:

o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode( ).

o To direct all intake air to the instrument panelvents, set the airflow control to "Face".

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

B740A01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Switch (If installed)

The air conditioning is turned on or off bypushing the A/C button on the heating/air con-ditioning control panel.

HGK2089-1

B740B01S-AAT

Air Conditioning OperationCooling

HGK002-1

Page 87: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

76

o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool"provides maximum cooling. The tempera-ture may be moderated by moving the con-trol toward "Warm".)

o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.For greater cooling, turn the fan control toone of the higher speeds or temporarilyselect the "Recirculation" position on the airintake control.

B740C01S-AAT

Dehumidified HeatingB730A01FC-AAT

Operation Tips

o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes fromentering the car through the ventilation sys-tem, temporarily set the air intake control to"Recirculation". Be sure to return the controlto "Fresh" when the irritation has passed tokeep fresh air in the vehicle. This will helpkeep the driver alert and comfortable.

o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawnin through the grilles just ahead of the wind-shield. Care should be taken that these arenot blocked by leaves, snow, ice or otherobstructions.

o To prevent interior fog on the windshield, setthe air intake control to the fresh air ( )position and fan speed to the desired posi-tion.

For dehumidified heating:

o Turn on the fan control switch.o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air

conditioning indicator light should come on atthe same time.

o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode( ).

o Set the air flow control to "Face".o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of

the higher speeds.o Adjust the temperature control to provide the

desired amount of warmth.

B740C01GK-A

Page 88: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

77DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B720A02FC-GAT

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog thewindshield:

To remove interior fog on the windshield:

o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (TheA/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will beactivated)

o Set the temperature control to the desired position.o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield:

o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (TheA/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".

NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to formon the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed controlto the low position.

A Type

B720A01GK-1 B720A02GK-1

B Type A Type B Type

Page 89: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

78 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT

(If lnstalled)

Your Hyundai is equipped with an automatic heating and cooling control system controlled by simply setting the desired temperature.

B970B02GK-GAT

Heating and Cooling Controls

TYPE A (Without Air Quality System) TYPE B (With Air Quality System)

1. Temperature Control Button2. Air Conditioning Switch3. Display Window4. Fan Speed Control Switch5. Air Flow Control Switch6. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch

7. Defroster Switch 8. OFF Switch 9. Air lntake Control Switch10.Ambient Temperature Switch11.Rear Window Defroster Switch12.Air Quality System Switch (If installed)

HGK2101 HGK2102

Page 90: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

79

B970C02E-AAT

Automatic Operation

The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Con-trol) system automatically controls heating andcooling as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator lightwill illuminate confirming that the Face, Floorand/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blowerspeed and, air conditioner will be controlledautomatically.

HGK21062. Push the "TEMP" button to set the desired

temperature.The temperature will increase to the maxi-mum 90°F(32°C) by pushing on the button.Each push of the button will cause the tem-perature to increase by 1°F(0.5°C).The temperature will decrease to the mini-mum 62°F(17°C) by pushing on the button.Each push of the button will cause the tem-perature to decrease by 1°F(0.5°C).

NOTE:If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the temperature mode will resetto centigrade degrees.This is a normal condition and you canchange the temperature mode from centi-grade to farenheit as follows;Press the TEMP button down 3 seconds ormore with the button held down. Thedisplay shows that the unit of temperatureis adjusted to centigrade or fahrenheit.(°C →→→→→ °F or °F →→→→→ °C)

NOTE:Never place anything over the sensor whichis located on the instrument panel to en-sure better control of the heating and cool-ing system.

HGK2103

HGK2076

Photo sensor

OUTSIDETEMP

Page 91: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

80

B995A01Y-GAT

Ambient Temperature Switch

Pressing the button displays the ambienttemperature on the display.

HGK2109

B980A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can be con-trolled manually as well by pushing buttonsother than the "AUTO" button. In this state, thesystem sequentially works according to theorder of buttons selected.The function of the buttons which are not se-lected will be controlled automatically.Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert toautomatic control of the system.

B980B01Y-AAT

Fan Speed Control Switch

The fan speed can be set to the desired speedby pressing the appropriate fan speed controlbutton. The higher the fan speed is, the more airis delivered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns offthe fan.

HGK2104

OUTSIDETEMP

Page 92: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

81

HGK2110-1

B670C01GK-AAT

Air Intake Control Switch(Without A.Q.S)

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculation inside air.To change the air intake control mode, (Freshmode, Recirculation mode) push the controlbutton.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light onthe button goes on when the air intake controlis in fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indica-tor light on the button is illuminated when the airintake control is in recirculation mode.

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters thevehicle from the outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air fromwithin the passenger compartment will be drawnthrough the heating system and heated orcooled according to the function selected.

NOTE:o It should be noted that prolonged opera-

tion of the heating system in "recircula-tion" mode will give rise to fogging of thewindshield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition, prolongeduse of the air conditioning with the "Re-circulation" mode selected may result inthe air within the passenger compart-ment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control will change to " "mode (regardless of switch position).This is normal operation. The air intakecontrol operates in "AUTO" mode whenturning the ignition to the ON position ifthe "AUTO" mode was used before shut-ting off the engine.

B980C01GK-GAT

Air Intake Control Switch (With A.Q.S)(If Installed)

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculate inside air automatically.

: OFF: ON

Fresh mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside and isheated or cooled according to the functionselected.

HGK2110

Page 93: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

82

Recirculation mode :

Air from within the passenger compartment willbe drawn through the heating system and heatedor cooled according to the function selected.

Exhaust gas cutoff mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside.But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle from theoutside, the exhaust gas cutoff mode ( ) isautomatically converted to the mode, toprevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE:o It should be noted that prolonged opera-

tion of the heating system in recircula-tion mode ( ) will give rise to mistingof the windshield and side windows andthe air within the passenger compart-ment will become stale. In addition, pro-longed use of the air conditioning withthe recirculation mode ( ) selectedmay result in the air within the passengercompartment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control will change to "Fresh( )" mode (regardless of the switchposition). This is normal operation. Theair intake control is operated in "AUTO"mode when turning the ignition to theON position if the "AUTO" mode wasused before shutting off the engine.

CAUTION:If the windows fog up with the Recircula-tion or A.Q.S mode selected, set the airintake control to the Fresh air position orA.Q.S control to "OFF".

!B980E01GK-GAT

Air Flow Control

B980D01Y-AAT

Heating and Cooling System Off

Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation ofthe heating and cooling system.

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can bedirected to the floor, instrument panel outlets, orwindshield. Four symbols are used to representFace, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost airposition.

HGK2105

Page 94: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

83

Face-Level

When selecting the "Face" mode, the indicatorlight will come on, causing air to be dischargedthrough the face level vents.

HGK2095

Bi-Level

When selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, the indica-tor light will come on and the air will be dis-charged through the face vents and the floorvents. This makes it possible to have cooler airfrom the dashboard vents and warmer air fromthe floor outlets at the same time.

HGK2096

Floor-Level

When selecting the "Floor-Level" mode, theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the floor vents, windshielddefroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle, sideventilator.

HGK2097

Page 95: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

84

Floor-Defrost Level

When selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode, theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the windshield defrostnozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle,side ventilator.

HGK2098

B980F02E-AAT

Defrost Switch

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the " "mode will be automatically selected and the airwill be discharged through the windshield de-frost vents. To assist in defrosting, the airconditioning will operate if ambient temperatureis higher than 38.3 °F (3.5 °C) and automaticallyturns off if the ambient temperature drops below38.3 °F (3.5 °C).

HGK012

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER(IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)

B760A05GK-AAT

(If Installed)

The air conditioner filter is located in front of theblower uniit behind the glove box.It operates to decrease the amount of pollutantsentering the car.To replace the air conditioner filter, refer to thepage 6-20.

B760A01E

Evaporator core

Filter

Heater core

Outside air

Inside air

Inside air

Blower fan

Page 96: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

85

! CAUTION:o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles

(15,000 km) or once a year. If the car isbeing driven in severe conditions suchas dusty, rough roads, more frequent airconditioner filter inspections andchanges are required.

o When the air flow rate is decreased, itmust be checked at an authorized dealer.

o If your vehicle is not equipped with thisfilter, it can be installed by your dealer.Check with your dealer for details.

Page 97: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

86 STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

Ionosphere

B750A02L

AM reception

Mountains

Buildings

Unobstructedarea

FM radio station

B750A03L

FM reception

B750A01L

Obstructed areaIron bridges

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequen-cies and do not bend to follow the earth'ssurface. Because of this, FM broadcasts gen-erally begin to fade at short distances from thestation. Also, FM signals are easily affected bybuildings, mountains, or other obstructions.These can result in certain listening conditionswhich might lead you to believe a problem existswith your radio. The following conditions arenormal and do not indicate radio trouble:

AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This is becauseAM radio waves are transmitted at low frequen-cies. These long, low frequency radio wavescan follow the curvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight out into the atmosphere. Inaddition, they curve around obstructions so thatthey can provide better signal coverage.

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast fromtransmitter towers located around your city.They are intercepted by the radio antenna onyour car. This signal is then received by theradio and sent to your car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reached yourvehicle, the precise engineering of your audiosystem ensures the best possible quality repro-duction. However, in some cases the signalcoming to your vehicle may not be strong andclear. This can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the presence ofbuildings, bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.

Ionosphere

Page 98: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

87

!

B750A04L B750A05L

o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weak-ens, another more powerful signal near thesame frequency may begin to play. This isbecause your radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs, selectanother station with a stronger signal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals beingreceived from several directions can causedistortion or fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal from the samestation, or by signals from two stations withclose frequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition has passed.

o Fading - As your car moves away from theradio station, the signal will weaken andsound will begin to fade. When this occurs,we suggest that you select another strongerstation.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or largeobstructions between the transmitter andyour radio can disturb the signal causingstatic or fluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen this effect until thedisturbance clears.

B750B02Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,noise may be produced from the audio equip-ment. This does not mean that something iswrong with the audio equipment. In such a case,use the cellular phone at a place as far aspossible from the audio equipment.

CAUTION:When using a communication system sucha cellular phone or a radio set inside thevehicle, a separate external antenna mustbe fitted. When a cellular phone or a radioset is used with an internal antenna alone,it may interfere with the vehicle's electricalsystem and adversely affect safe operationof the vehicle.

WARNING:Don't use a cellular phone when you aredriving. Stop at a safe place to use a cellularphone.

!

Page 99: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

88 AUDIO SYSTEM

H240A01O-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H250) (If Installed)

1. POWER ON/OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

H250A01GK

2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob(BASS/BAL)

3. TREBLE/FADER Control Knob(TREB/FAD)

4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

5. BAND Selector

6. PRESET Buttons7. SCAN Button

Page 100: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

89

H240B02A-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF ControlKnob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press theknob to switch the power on. The LCD showsthe radio frequency in the radio mode or the tapedirection indicator in the tape mode. To switchthe power off, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclockwise toreduce the volume.

2. BASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left orright for the desired bass tone.

BAL (Balance Control) Knob

Pull the bass control knob further out. Turn thecontrol knob clockwise to emphasize rightspeaker sound (left speaker sound will beattenuated).When the control knob is turned counterclock-wise, left speaker sound will be emphasized(right speaker sound will be attenuated).

3. TREB (Treble Control) Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left orright for the desired treble tone.

FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Pull the treble control knob further out.Turn the control knob counterclockwise toemphasize front speaker sound (rear speakersound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turned clockwise, rearspeaker sound will be emphasized (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated).

4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the side or side to increase or todecrease the frequency. Press either buttonand hold down to continuously scroll. Releasebutton once the desired station is reached.

SEEK Operation(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the TUNE select button 1 sec ormore.Releasing it will automatically tune to thenext available station with a beep sound.When the side is pressed longer than 1 second,releasing will automatically tune to the nexthigher frequency and when the side is pressedlonger than 1 second, releasing will automati-cally tune to the next lower frequency.

5. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM,FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected isdisplayed on LCD.

6. PRESET STATION SELECTButton

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic memorycircuit on this unit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,FM1, or FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored byseek or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station select buttonyou wish to use to access that station.

FM/AM

Page 101: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

90

!

o Press the station select button for more thantwo seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored intothe memory with a beep sound. You shouldthen release the button, and proceed toprogram the next desired station. A total of18 stations can be programmed by selectingone AM and two FM stations per button.

o When completed, any preset station may berecalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 bandand the appropriate station button.

7. SCAN Button

When the scan button is pressed, the frequencywill increase and the receivable stations will betuned in one after another, receiving each sta-tion for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press thescan button again.

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-nism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe audio system mechanism could bedamaged.

Page 102: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

91

H240C01O-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H250) (If Installed)

1. FF/REW Button

H240C01GK

2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

4. EJECT Button

5. DOLBY SELECT Button

6. TAPE SLOT

Page 103: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

92

!H240A02O-AAT

1. FF/REW Button

o The FF (fast forward tape winding) startswhen the button is pressed during PLAYor REW.

o The PLAY starts when the button ispressed again during FF.

o The REW (rewinding) starts when thebutton is pressed during PLAY or FF.

o The PLAY starts when the button ispressed again during REW.

2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button

Press the button to find the starting point of eachsong in a prerecorded music tape.The quiet space between songs (must have atleast a 4 sec. gap) can be identified by the AUTOMUSIC SELECT button.

o Pressing the button will play the beginningof the next music segment.

o Pressing the button will start replay atthe beginning of the music just listened to.

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

This allows you to play the reverse side of thetape by merely depressing the program button.An arrow will appear in the display to show tapedirection.

NOTE:When tape operation is abnormal or ER8fault code is displayed, press the ejectbutton more than 5 seconds to reset thedeck function.

4. EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressed with acassette loaded, the cassette will eject.

o When the EJECT button is pressed duringFF/REW, the cassette will eject.

5. DOLBY SELECT Button

If you get background noise during PLAY, youcan reduce this considerably by merely press-ing DOLBY SELECT button.If you want to release, press the button again.

CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

Page 104: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

93

H260A01O-AAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

H260A01GK

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME/BALANCE Control Knob

2. FADER Control Knob

3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob

4. SCAN Button

7. PRESET Buttons

5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

6. BAND Selector

Page 105: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

94

H260B03E-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press theknob to switch the power on. The LCD showsthe radio frequency in the radio mode or the CDtrack indicator in either the CD mode or CDAUTO CHANGER mode. To switch the poweroff, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclockwise toreduce the volume.

BALANCE Control

Pull and turn the control knob clockwise toemphasize right speaker sound (left speakersound will be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counterclockwise, left speakersound will be emphasized (right speaker soundwill be attenuated).

2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Turn the control knob counterclockwise toemphasize front speaker sound (rear speakersound will be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned clockwise, rear speaker soundwill be emphasized (front speaker sound will beattenuated).

3. BASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left orright for the desired bass tone.

TREB (Treble Control) Knob

Pull the bass control knob further out. Turn to theleft or right for the desired treble tone.

4. SCAN Button

When the scan button is pressed, the frequencywill increase and the receivable stations will betuned in one after another, receiving each sta-tion for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press thescan button again.

5. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or todecrease the frequency. Press either buttonand hold down to continuously scroll. Releasebutton once the desired station is reached.

SEEK Operation (Automatic ChannelSelection)

Press the TUNE select button for 1 sec or more.Releasing it will automatically tune to the nextavailable station with a beep sound.When the ( ) side is pressed longer than 1second, releasing will automatically tune to thenext higher frequency and when the ( ) sideis pressed longer than 1 second, releasing willautomatically tune to the next lower frequency.

Page 106: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

95

6. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM,FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected isdisplayed on LCD.

7. PRESET STATION SELECTButton

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 or FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic memorycircuit on this unit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,FM1 or FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored byseek, scan or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station select buttonyou wish to use to access that station.

o Press the station select button for more thantwo seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored intothe memory.You should then release the button, andproceed to program the next desired station.A total of 18 stations can be programmed byselecting one AM and two FM stations perbutton.

o When completed, any preset station may berecalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 bandand the appropriate station button.

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-nism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe audio system mechanism could bedamaged.

!FM/AM

Page 107: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

96

H260B01O-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

H260B01GK

1. Playing CD

2. FF/REW Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. SCAN Button

5. REPEAT Button

6. EJECT Button

Page 108: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

97

B260D03O-AAT

1. Playing CD

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during

radio operation.o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press

the CD button, the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio is being used.

o The CD player can be used when the ignitionswitch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold the FF( ) or REW ( ) button.When you release the button, the compact discplayer will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently beingplayed can be selected using the tracknumber.

o Press once to skip forward to the beginn-ing of the next track. Press once to skipback to the beginning of the track.

4. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.When you have reached the desired track.

5. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel ,press again.

o If you do not release RPT operation when thetrack ends, it will automatically be replayed.This process will be continued until you pushthe button again.

6. EJECT Button

When the EJECT button is pressed with aCD loaded, the CD will eject.

NOTE:o If the CD does not operate properly or if

the ER2 fault code is displayed, use oneof two methods to reset the CD deckfunction.- Remove the audio fuse for 5 minutes.

Then, reinstall the audio fuse.- Disconnect the negative terminal of

the battery and wait 5 minutes. Thenreconnect the negative battery termi-nal.

o To assure proper operation of the unit,keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle’s air conditioning or heatingsystem.

o When replacing the fuse, replace it witha fuse having the correct capacity.

o The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have to beset again if this should occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.Keep magnets, screwdrivers and othermetallic objects away from the tapemechanism and head.

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

Page 109: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

98

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers) to water or excessivemoisture.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

o Driving off-road or other vibrations mayskip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system off-road asthe discs could be scratched and dam-aged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause poor disc scratching tooccur or trouble in the compact discplayer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable to ensure proper operation.When using the compact disc player,genuine CDs are recommended.

Page 110: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

99

B260E01E-AAT

CD AUTO CHANGER (H260) (If installed)

H260E01GK

1. CD Select Button

2. DISC Select Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. FF/REW Button

5. REPEAT Button

6. SCAN Button

Page 111: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

100

B260F01GK-AAT

The CD auto changer is located in the right sideof the quater trim.

o To use the CD auto changer.

1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto changer.2. To eject the compact disc magazine, press

the EJECT button located inside the CD autochanger.

3. Insert the discs into the magazine.4. Push the magazine into the CD auto changer

and close the sliding lid.

o The CD auto changer can be used when theignition switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC"position.

1. CD Select Button

When the CD changer magazine contains discs,press the "CD" button and the CD changer canbe used even if the radio is being used. TheHyundai CD changer can hold up to eight discs.The disc number will be lit, and the track number,and elapsed time will be displayed.

2. DISC Select Button

To select the CD you want, push " " to changethe disc number.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently beingplayed can be selected using the tracknumber.

o Press once to skip forward to the begin-ning of the next track. Press once to skipback to the beginning of the track.

4. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold in the FF( ) or REW ( ) button.When you release the button, the compact discplayer will resume playing.

5. REPEAT

o To repeat the music you are listening to,press the RPT button. To cancel, pressagain.

o If you do not release RPT operation when thetrack ends, it will automatically be replayed.This process will be continued until you pushthe button again.

6. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.for the desired track.

NOTE:o When replacing the fuse, replace it with

a fuse having the correct capacity.o This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

TUNEDISC

Page 112: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

101

CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD changer as damage tothe unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into thechanger slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

o Driving off-road or other vibrations mayskip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system off-road asthe discs could be scratched and dam-aged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause disc scratching to oc-cur or trouble in the compact discchanger.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable to ensure proper operation.When using the compact disc changer,genuine CDs are recommended.

!

Page 113: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

102

H290A01FC-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H280) (If installed)

H290A01GK

1. POWER ON/OFF VOLUME Control Knob

2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob3. TREBLE/FAD Konb

4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

5. PRESET Buttons

6. BAND Select Button

7. EQUALIZER Button

8. SCAN Button (If installed)

Page 114: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

103

H290B03E-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press thebutton to switch the power on. The displayshows the radio frequency in the radio mode,the tape direction indicator in the tape mode orCD track in either the CD mode or CD AUTOCHANGER mode. To switch the power off,press the button again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclockwise toreduce the volume.

2. BASS/BALANCE Control KnobBASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out. To increase the bass,rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease thebass, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

BALANCE Control knob

Pull the Bass control knob out further. Rotate theknob clockwise to emphasize right speakersound (left speaker sound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turned counterclock-wise, left speaker sound will be emphasized(right speaker sound will be attenuated).

3. TREBLE/FAD KnobTREBLE Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left orright for the desired treble tone.

FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Pull the Treble control knob out further. Turn thecontrol knob counterclockwise to emphasizefront speaker sound (rear speaker sound will beattenuated). When the control knob is turnedclockwise, rear speaker sound will be empha-sized (front speaker sound will be attenuated).

4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or todecrease the frequency. Press either buttonand hold down to continuously scroll. Releasebutton once the desired station is reached.

SEEK Operation (Automatic ChannelSelection)

Press the TUNE select button for 0.5 sec ormore. Releasing it will automatically tune to thenext available station with a beep sound.When the ( ) side is pressed longer than 0.5second, releasing will automatically tune to thenext higher frequency and when the ( ) side ispressed longer than 0.5 second, releasing willautomatically tune to the next lower frequency.

5. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

Six (6) stations for AM, FM and FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic memorycircuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:

Page 115: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

104

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,FM or FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored byseek or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station select buttonyou wish to use to access that station.

o Press the station select button for more thantwo seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored intothe memory with beep sound. You shouldthen release the button, and proceed toprogram the next desired station. A total of18 stations can be programmed by selectingone AM and two FM station per button.

o When completed, any preset station may berecalled by selecting AM, FM or FM2 bandand the appropriate station button.

6. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM,FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected isshown on the display.

7. EQUALIZER Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

FM/AM

8. SCAN Button (If installed)

When the scan button is pressed, the frequencywill increase and the receivable stations will betuned in one after another, receiving each sta-tion for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press thescan button again.

! CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-nism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe audio system mechanism could bedamaged.

Page 116: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

105

H290C01FC-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H280) (If installed)

H290A02GK

1. FF/REW Button

2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button

5. EQUALIZER Button

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

4. TAPE EJECT Button

6. DOLBY Button

Page 117: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

106

H290D02O-GAT

1. FF/REW Button

o Fast forward tape winding starts when theFF ( ) button is pressed during the PLAYor REW mode.

o Tape play starts when the FF ( ) buttonis pressed again during the FF mode.

o Tape rewinding starts when the REW( ) button is pressed during the PLAY orFF mode.

o Tape play starts when the REW ( ) buttonpressed again during the REW mode.

2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button

Press the button to find the starting point of eachsong in a prerecorded music tape. The quietspace between songs (must have at least a 4sec. gap) can be identified by the AUTO MUSICSelect button.

o Pressing the button will play the beginn-ing of the next music segment.

o Pressing the button will start replay atthe beginning of the music just listened to.

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

This allows you to play the reverse side of thetape by merely depressing the program button.An arrow will appear in the display to show tapedirection.

4. TAPE EJECT button

o When the button is pressed with thecassette loaded, the cassette is ejected.

o When the button is pressed during theFF/REW mode, the cassette is ejected.

5. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

6. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tape PLAY,you can reduce this considerably by merelypressing the DOLBY button. If you want tocancel the DOLBY feature, press the buttonagain.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

Page 118: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

107

H290E01FC-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H280) (If installed)

H290A03GK1. CD Select Button

2. FF/REW Button

5. EQUALIZER Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. REPEAT

7. SCAN Button (If installed)

6. CD EJECT Button

Page 119: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

108

H290F01O-GAT

1. CD Select Button

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during

radio operation or cassette tape playing.o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press

the CD button the CD player will begin playingeven if the radio or cassette player is beingused.

o The CD player can be used when the ignitionswitch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold the FF( ) or REW ( ) button.When you release the button, the compact discplayer will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently beingplayed can be selected using the tracknumber.

o Press button once to skip forward to thebeginning of the next track. Press buttononce to skip back to the beginning of thetrack.

4. REPEAT

o To repeat the track you are listening to,press the RPT button. To cancel, pressagain.

o If you do not release RPT operation when thetrack ends, it will automatically be replayed.This process will be continued until you pushthe button again.

5. EQUALIZER Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

7. SCAN Button (If installed)

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.When you have reached the desired track.

NOTE:o To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle’s air conditioning or heatingsystem.

o When replacing the fuse, replace it witha fuse having the correct capacity.

o The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have to beset again if this should occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.Keep magnets, screwdrivers and othermetallic objects away from the tapemechanism and head.

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

6. CD EJECT Button

When the button is pressed with a CD loaded,the CD will eject.

Page 120: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

109

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and tape) to water orexcessive moisture.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

o Driving off-road or other vibrations mayskip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system off-road asthe discs could be scratched and dam-aged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause disc scratching to oc-cur or trouble in the compact disc player.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable to ensure porper operation.When using the compact disc player,genuine CDs are recommended.

Page 121: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

110

H290G01FC-GAT

CD AUTO CHANGER (H280) (If Installed)

H290A04GK1. CD CHANGER Select Button

2. DISC Select Button

6. SCAN Button (If installed)

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. FF/REW Button

7. EQ Button

5. REPEAT

Page 122: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

111

B290H01GK-GAT

The CD auto changer is located in the right sideof the quater trim.

o To use the CD auto changer.

1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto changer.2. To eject the compact disc magazine, press

the EJECT button located inside the CD autochanger.

3. Insert the discs into the magazine.4. Push the magazine into the CD auto changer

and close the sliding lid.

o The CD auto changer can be used when theignition switch is in either "ON" or "ACC"position.

1. CD CHANGER Select Button

When the CD changer magazine contains discs,press the "CD/CDC" button and the CD changercan be used even if the radio or cassette playeris being used. The Hyundai CD changer canhold up to eight discs. The disc number will belit, and the track number, and elapsed time willbe displayed.

2. DISC Select Button

To select the CD you want, push " " to changethe disc number.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently beingplayed can be selected using the tracknumber.

o Press once to skip forward to the beginn-ing of the next track. Press once to skipback to the beginning of the track.

4. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold in the FF( ) or REW ( ) button.When you release the button, the compact discplayer will resume playing.

5. REPEAT

o To repeat the music you are listening to,press the RPT button. To cancel, pressagain.

o If you do not release RPT operation when thetrack ends, it will automatically be replayed.This process will be continued until you pushthe button again.

6. SCAN Button (If installed)

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.for the desired track.

7. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

TUNEDISC

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

NOTE:o When replacing the fuse, replace it with

a fuse having the correct capacity.o This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

Page 123: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

112

CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the changer as damage to theunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into thechanger slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

o Driving off-road or other vibrations mayskip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system off-road asthe discs could be scratched and dam-aged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause disc scratching to oc-cur or trouble in the compact discchanger.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable to ensure proper operation.When using the compact disc changer,genuine CDs are recommended.

!

Page 124: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

113

6. EQ Button

J290A01JM-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (J290) (If installed)

J290A01JM

1. POWER ON/OFF/VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND Select Button

3. SEEK Select Button

4. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

5. BEST STATIONMEMORY

7. TUNE Select Knob /MODE Select Knob

Page 125: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

114

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

J290B01JM-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUMEControl Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press thebutton to switch the power on. The displayshows the radio frequency in the radio mode,the tape direction indicator in the tape mode, orCD track in the CD AUTO CHANGER mode. Toswitch the power off, press the button again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclockwise toreduce the volume.

2. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM, FM1 andFM2 bands. The mode selected is shown on thedisplay.

3. SEEK Select Button(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the SEEK select button 1 sec. or more.When the ( ) side is pressed, the unit willautomatically tune to the next higher frequencyand when the ( ) side is pressed, it willautomatically tune to the next lower frequency.

o When completed, any preset station may berecalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 bandand the appropriate station button.

5. Best Station Memory Button(BSM)

When the BSM button is pressed for two sec-onds or longer, the six channels from the high-est field intensity are selected next and storedin memory. The stations selected are stored inthe sequence frequency from the first presetkey.

6. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

4. PRESET STATION SelectButtons

Six (6) stations for AM, FM and FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic memorycircuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the AM / FM select button and/or one of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:o Press AM/FM selector to set the band for

AM, FM1 and FM2.o Select the desired station to be stored by

seek, scan or manual tuning.o Determine the preset station select button

you wish to use to access that station.o Press the station select button for more than

two seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored intothe memory. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program the nextdesired station. A total of 18 stations can beprogrammed by selecting one AM and twoFM station per button.

7. TUNE (Manual) Select Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thefrequency and turn the knob counterclockwiseto reduce the frequency.

Page 126: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

115

Mode Select Knob

Pressing the MODE button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCEmode.The mode selected is shown on the display.After selecting the each mode, rotate the modeselect knob clockwise or counterclockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knob clock-wise, while to decrease the BASS, rotate theknob counterclockwise.

MID Control

To increase the MID, rotate the knob clockwise,while to decrease the MID, rotate the knobcounterclockwise.

TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob clock-wise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate theknob counterclockwise.

FAD (Fader Control)

Rotate the control knob clockwise to empha-size rear speaker sound (front speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the control knob isturned counterclockwise, front speaker soundwill be emphasized (rear speaker sound will beattenuated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize rightspeaker sound (left speaker sound will beattenuated). When the control knob is turnedcounterclockwise, left speaker sound will beemphasized (right speaker sound will be at-tenuated).

! CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-nism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe audio system mechanism could bedamaged.

Page 127: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

116

J290C01JM-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (J290) (If installed)

J290C01JM

1.TAPE PROGRAM Button

3. DOLBY Button

4.REPEAT Button

5.AUTO MUSIC Select Button

6.FF/REW Button

2.EJECT Button

Page 128: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

117

J290D01JM-GAT

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button

This allows you to play the reverse side of thetape by merely pressing the program button.The PLAY and an arrow will appear in the displayto show tape direction.

2. EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressed with acassette loaded, the cassette will eject.

o When the EJECT button is pressed duringFF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

3. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tape PLAY,you can reduce this considerably by merelypressing the DOLBY button. If you want tocancel the DOLBY feature, press the buttonagain.

4. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel,press again.

o If you do not release RPT operation when thetrack ends, it will automatically be replayed.This process will be continued until you pushthe button again.

5. AUTO MUSIC Select Button

Press the button to find the starting point of eachsong in a prerecorded music tape. The quietspace between songs (must have at least a 4sec. gap) can be identified by the AUTO MUSICSelect button.

o Pressing the will play the beginning of thenext music segment.

o Pressing the will start replay at thebeginning of the music just listened to.

o To stop FF or REW action, press the buttonagain.

6. FF/REW Button

o Fast forward tape winding starts when theFF button is pressed during PLAY or REWmode.

o PLAY starts when the FF ( ) button ispressed again during FF mode.

o Tape rewinding starts when the REW ( )button is pressed during PLAY or FF mode.

o PLAY starts when the REW button pressedagain during REW mode.

CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

!

Page 129: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

118

1.LOAD Button

J290E01JM-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER / CD AUTO CHANGER OPERATION (J290) (If installed)

J290E01JM

2.Playing CD

3.EJECT Button

4. DISC SelectButton

5.RANDOM Play Button

6.REPEAT Button7.TRACK UP/DOWN

8.FF/REW Button

9.SCAN Button

10.EQ Button

Page 130: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

119

J290F02JM-GAT

1. LOAD Button

This compact disc playing will accommodate upto six discs.

To insert one disc do the following:

1. Press and release the LOAD Button.2. Green light on both sides of the slot will be

illuminated and the will blink ten times onthe display.

3. Load a disc while the is blinking. Insert adisc partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull the disc in.

NOTE:o The disc can be only inserted while the

light is blinking.o This CD player is suitable only for 12 cm

discs, do not use irregular shaped CDs.

When the disc is inserted, the disc will begin toplay automatically.

To insert multiple discs do the followings:

1. Press and hold the LOAD button for twoseconds or more.You will then hear two beeps and the greenlight on the both sides of the slot will beilluminated.

2. Load a disc while the is blinking. Inserta disc partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull the disc in.Once the disc is loaded, the numbers of thevacant disc will blink on the display continu-ously. If the next "DISC NO." is appeared onthe display with the both side of the slotilluminated, you can then load another disc.

3. Load the remaining disc by following the sameprocedures 1 and 2.When you finished loading 6 discs, the CDplayer will begin to play the last CD loaded.

4. To load more than one disc but less than six,complete Steps 1 and 2. When you havefinished loading discs, press LOAD button tocancel the loading function or wait for 10seconds. The CD player will begin to play thelast CD loaded.

As each CD starts to play, the DISC number willappear on the display.

NOTE:The disc player takes up to six discs. Do nottry to load more than six.

2. Playing CD

o Press the 6CDC to start CD playback,during radio operation or cassette tape play-ing.

o When discs are in the CD deck, if you pressthe 6CDC button the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio or cassette playeris being used.

o The CD player can be used when the ignitionswitch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

3. EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressed witha CD loaded, the CD will eject.

o To eject all of the discs, press this button for2 seconds or more.

4.DISC Select Button

To select the CD you want, push "DISC " or "DISC " to change the disc number.

Page 131: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

120

5. RANDOM Button

With random, you can listen to the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential order, on all ofthe discs or on one disc.To use random, do the following:

o Press and release the RDM button to playthe tracks on all of the discs or on one discthat are loaded, in random order. RDM willappear in the display. Press RDM to turn ifoff.

6. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel,press again.

o If you do not release RPT operation after allthe tracks are played back, the unit will playback again from the first track.

7. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently beingplayed can be selected using the tracknumber.

o Press once to skip forward to the begin-ning of the next track.

o Press once to skip back to the beginningof the track.

8. FF/REW Button

While the disc is playing, if you hold down the FFbutton continuously, the selected track is ad-vanced. Holding down the REW button continu-ously moves the selected track back.

9. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.when you have reached the desired track.

10. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

NOTE:o To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heating sys-tem.

o When replacing the fuse, replace it witha fuse having the correct capacity.

o The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have to beset again if this should occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.Keep magnets, screwdrivers and othermetallic objects away from the tapemechanism and head.

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and tape) to water orexcessive moisture.

Page 132: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

121

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

o Driving off-road or other vibrations mayskip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system off-roadsas the discs could be scratched anddamaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause disc scratching to oc-cur or trouble in the compact disc player.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable to ensure proper operation.When using the compact disc player,genuine CDs are recommended.

Page 133: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

122 AUDIO FAULT CODE

INDICATION

Er2

Er3

Er6

Er8

HHH

no CD

B890A01Y-AAT

If you see any error indication in the display while using the system in the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below.If you cannot clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.

SOLUTION

After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

Press the eject button and pull out the disc.

Then insert a normal CD disc.

Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

If tape does not eject, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns to normal.

Insert disc in magazine or insert CD magazine in the auto changer.

CAUSE

CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR

(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR)

FOCUS ERROR

DATA READ ERROR

DISC ERROR

TAPE DECK ERROR

TAPE EJECT ERROR

TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH

NO DISC IN MAGAZINE

NO CD MAGAZINE IN THE AUTO CHANGER

Page 134: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

123CARE OF CASSETTE TAPESCARE OF DISCS

B850A02F-AAT

Proper Handling

B850A01L

Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop thedisc. Hold the disc so you will not leave finger-prints on the surface. If the surface is scratched,it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Donot affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on thedisc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warped orcracked discs. These could severely damagethe playback mechanism.

Storage

When not in use, place your discs in theirindividual case and store them in a cool placeaway from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with your handwhile the disc is being pulled into the unit by theself loading mechanism.

Keep Your Discs Clean

B850A02L

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disccould cause the pickup to skip signal tracks.Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth.If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a cleansoft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergentto wipe it clean.

B860A01A-AAT

Proper care of your cassette tapes will extendthe tape life and increase your listening enjoy-ment. Always protect your tapes and cassettecases from direct sunlight, severely cold anddusty conditions. When not in use, cassettesshould always be stored in the original protec-tive cassette case. When the vehicle is very hotor cold, allow the interior temperature to becomemore comfortable before listening to your cas-settes.

B860A01L

Page 135: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

124

Head

Cotton applicator

HGK062

B860A02L

o Never leave a cassette inserted in the playerwhen not being played. This could damagethe tape player unit and the cassette tape.

o We strongly recommend against the use oftapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total).Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thinand do not perform as well in the automotiveenvironment.

o The playback head, capstan and pinch roll-ers will develop a coating of tape residue thatcan result in deterioration of sound quality,such as a wavering sound. They should becleaned monthly using a commercially avail-able head cleaning tape or special solutionavailable from audio specialty shops. Followthe supplier's directions carefully and neveroil any part of the tape player unit.

o Always be sure that the tape is tightly woundon its reel before inserting in the player.Rotate a pencil in the drive sprockets to windup any slack.

o Be sure that the cassette label is not looseor peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.

o Never touch or soil the actual audio tapesurfaces.

o Keep all magnetized objects, such as elec-tric motors, speakers or transformers awayfrom your cassette tapes and tape playerunit.

o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with theopen side facing down to prevent dust fromsetting in the cassette body.

o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replayone given tune or tape section. This cancause poor tape winding to occur, and even-tually cause excessive internal drag andpoor audio quality in the cassette. If thisoccurs, it can sometimes be corrected byfast winding the tape from end to end severaltimes. If this does not correct the problem, donot continue to use the tape in your vehicle.

Page 136: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

125

!

ANTENNA

B860A03L

NOTE:Look at a tape before you insert it.If the tape is loose, tighten it by turning oneof the hubs with a pencil or your finger.If the label is peeling off, do not put it in thedrive mechanism.Do not leave tapes sitting where they areexposed to hot, warm, or high humidity,such as on top of the dashboard or in theplayer.If a tape is exposed to excessively hot orcold, let it reach a moderate temperaturebefore putting it in the player.

B870A01A-AAT

Fixed Rod Antenna

Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to receiveboth AM and FM broadcast signals.This antenna is a removable type. To removethe antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To installthe antenna, turn it clockwise.

CAUTION:o Be sure to remove the antenna before

washing the car in an automatic carwash or it may be damaged.

o When reinstalling your antenna, it isimportant that it is fully tightened toensure proper reception.

B870A01A

Page 137: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3Key Positions ................................................................ 2-3Starting .......................................................................... 2-4Operating the Manual Transaxle ................................... 2-5Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-7Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-11Good Braking Practices .............................................. 2-11Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............................. 2-12Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-14Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-15Trailer or Vehicle Towing ............................................ 2-18Vehicle Load Limit ....................................................... 2-21

2

Page 138: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A01GK-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a changein the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checkedas soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage anylonger than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intakeset at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clearof snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

!

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle,contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluidscontained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancerand birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Page 139: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

3

!

KEY POSITIONS

C040A01A-AAT

WARNING:The engine should not be turned off or thekey removed from the ignition key cylinderwhile the vehicle is in motion. The steeringwheel is locked by removing the key.

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. It will crankuntil you release the key.

C040A01E-1

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

C020A01A-AAT

Before you start the engine, you should always:

1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there areno flat tires, puddles of oil, water or otherindications of possible trouble.

2. After entering the car, check to be sure theparking brake is engaged.

3. Check that all windows, and lights are clean.4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors

are clean and in position.5. Check your seat, seatback and headrest to

be sure they are in their proper positions.6. Close all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all

other occupants have fastened theirs.8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are

not needed.9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON",

check that all appropriate warning lights areoperating and that you have sufficient fuel.

10.Check the operation of warning lights and allbulbs when key is in the "ON" position.

TO START THE ENGINE

C030A01A-AAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH

o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manualtransaxle, place the shift lever in neutral anddepress the clutch pedal fully.

o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle,place the shift lever in "P" (park).

o To start the engine, insert the ignition key andturn it to the "START" position. Release it assoon as the engine starts. Do not hold thekey in the "START" position for more than 15seconds.

NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if the

clutch pedal is not depressed fully(Manual transaxle) or the shift lever isnot in "P" or "N" Position (Automatictransaxle).

o The ignition key cannot be turned from"ACC" position to "LOCK" position un-less the shift lever is in the "P" (Park)position or the negative battery terminalis disconnected from the battery. Toremove the key, always confirm that theshift lever is securely positioned in "P"(Park) (For Automatic transaxle)

o For additional information about start-ing, see page 2-5.

Page 140: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

4 STARTING

!

C070C03A-AAT

To Remove the Ignition KeyC050A01A-AATNOTE:

Do not hold the key in the "START" positionfor more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON" position, the ignitionis on and all accessories may be turned on. Ifthe engine is not running, the key should not beleft in the "ON" position. This will discharge thebattery and may also damage the ignition sys-tem.

o "ACC"

With the key in the "ACC" position, some elec-trical accessories (radio, etc.) may be oper-ated.

o "LOCK"

The key can be removed or inserted in thisposition. To protect against theft, the steeringwheel locks by removing the key.

NOTE:To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key,and then turn the steering wheel and keysimultaneously.

1. Turn the ignition key counterclockwise fromthe "ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.

2. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed or poorlyventilated area any longer than is needed tomove your car in or out of the area. Thecarbon monoxide gas emitted is odorlessand can cause serious injury or death.

C070C01E-1

C050A01E-1

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

LOCK ON

START

Page 141: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

5

C050B01JM-AAT

NORMAL CONDITIONS:The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place the

gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in neutralor the selector lever (automatic transaxle) in"P" (park) position.

3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"position, make certain all warning lights andgauges are functioning properly before start-ing the engine.

WARNING:Be sure that the clutch is fully depressedwhen starting a manual transaxle vehicle.Your manual transaxle equipped vehiclewill not start unless the clutch pedal is fullydepressed.

!

4. Turn the ignition key to the "Start" positionand release it when the engine starts.After the engine has started, allow the engineto run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placingthe vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated for morethan 15 seconds at a time. Wait 15-30 sec-onds between starting attempts to protectthe starter from overheating.

OPERATING THE MANUALTRANSAXLE

C070A01GK-AAT

Your Hyundai's manual transaxle has a con-ventional shift pattern. This shift pattern is im-printed on the shift knob. The transaxle is fullysynchronized in all forward gears so shifting toeither a higher or a lower gear is easily accom-plished.

HGK3023

Type A Type B

When shifting into reverse gear, pull the mis-shift prevention tab and shift into reverse gearposition. (B Type: 6 speed type)

NOTE:o To shift into reverse, rest the lever in

neutral for at least 3 seconds after yourcar is completely stopped. Then movethe lever into the reverse position.

o During cold weather, shifting may bedifficult until the transaxle lubricant haswarmed up. This is normal and not harm-ful to the transaxle.

HGK3024

Type B

Mis-shiftpreventiontab

Page 142: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

6

C070B01A-AAT

Using the Clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way to thefloor before shifting, then released slowly. Theclutch pedal should always be fully returned tothe original position. Do not rest your foot on theclutch pedal while driving. This can cause un-necessary wear.Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the caron an incline. This causes unnecessary wear.Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold thecar on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedalrapidly and repeatedly.

CAUTION:When downshifting from fifth gear to fourthgear, caution should be taken not to inad-vertently press the gear shift lever sidewaysin such a manner that second gear is en-gaged. Such a drastic downshift may causethe engine speed to increase to the pointthat the tachometer will enter the red zone.Such over-revving of the engine may causeengine damage.

C070D03A-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This is extremely hazardous.Always leave the car in gear.

o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause themto overheat and malfunction. Instead, whenyou are driving down a long hill, slow downand shift to a lower gear. When you do this,engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.This will help avoid over-revving the engine,which can cause damage.

o Slow down when you encounter cross winds.This gives you much better control of yourcar.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into reverse. Thetransaxle can be damaged if you do not. Toshift into reverse, depress the clutch, movethe shift lever to neutral, wait three seconds,then shift to the reverse position.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.

!

o If you 've come to a complete stop andit's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),put the shift lever in N(Neutral) positionand release the clutch. Press the clutchpedal down, and then shift into 1st orR(Reverse) gear position.

o Do not use the shift lever as a handrestduring driving, as this can result in pre-mature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

Page 143: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

7

C070E01GK-AAT

RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS

The shift points as shown below are recom-mended for optimum fuel economy and perfor-mance.

! WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane changes orfast, sharp turns.

o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision crash, unbelted person issignificantly more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed than a person wearing aseatbelt.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-way speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.

Shift

from-to

1-2

2-3

3-4

4-5

Recommended

15 mph (20 km/h)

25 mph (40 km/h)

35 mph (55 km/h)

45 mph (75 km/h)

Shift

from-to

1-2

2-3

3-4

4-5

5-6

Recommended

10 mph (15 km/h)

20 mph (35 km/h)

30 mph (50 km/h)

45 mph (70 km/h)

60 mph (95 km/h)

Type A (5 speed)

Type B (6 speed)

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

C090A03Y-AAT

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxlehas four forward speeds and one reversespeed. The individual speeds are selected au-tomatically, depending on the position of thespeed selector lever. The selector lever has 2gates; the main gate and the manual gate.

NOTE:For information on manual gate operation,refer to "Sports Mode".

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4positions, and is equipped with a button to avoidinadvertent selection.

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if the

HGK3025

Page 144: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

8

!

C090B01A-AAT

The function of each position is as fol-lows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked orwhile starting the engine. Whenever parking thecar, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle is fullystopped. Failure to observe this cautionwill cause severe damage to the transaxle.

battery has been disconnected, may besomewhat abrupt. This is a normal condi-tion, and the shifting sequence will adjustafter shifts are cycled a few times by theT.C.M (Transaxle Control Module).

NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and pushthe button when shifting.

Push the button when shifting.

The selector lever can be shiftedfreely.

The indicator lights in the instrument clusterindicate the selector lever position when theignition is switched "ON". During the sportsmode operation, the gear currently in use dis-plays in the numeral indicator.

HGK3040

!

C090E01O-AAT

o D(Drive):

Use for normal driving. The transaxle will auto-matically shift through a four gear sequence.

C090D02O-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,which means that no gears are engaged. Theengine can be started with the shift lever in "N"position, although this is not recommendedexcept if the engine stalls while the car ismoving.

C090C01A-AAT

o R(Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car toa complete stop before shifting the selectorlever to "R" position.

CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position while thevehicle is moving.

Page 145: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

9

C090F02GK-GAT

Sports Mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion,sports mode is selected by pushing the selectorlever from the "D" position into the manual gate.To return to "D" range operation, push theselector lever back into the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selector lever back-wards and forwards can make rapid gearshiftssimple. In contrast to a manual transaxle, thesports mode allows gearshifts with the accel-erator pedal depressed.UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift upone gear.DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards once toshift down one gear.

HGK3027

! CAUTION:o In sports mode, the driver must execute

shifts in accordance with prevailing roadconditions, taking care to keep the en-gine speed below the red zone.

o For engine protection, upward shifts aremade automatically when the enginerpm reaches the red zone.

o By rapidly moving the selector leverbackwards (-) twice it is possible to skipone gear by using the sports mode.Since sudden engine braking and/orrapid acceleration can cause a loss oftraction, however, downshifts must bemade carefully in accordance with thevehicle's speed.

NOTE:o In sports mode, only the four forward

gears can be selected. To select reverseor park, move the selector lever to the "R"or "P" position as required.

o In sports mode, downward shifts aremade automatically when the vehicleslows down. When the vehicle stops, 1stgear is automatically selected.

o To maintain the required levels of ve-hicle performance and safety, the sys-tem may not execute certain gearshiftswhen the selector lever is operated.

o Before driving away from a stop on aslippery road, push the selector leverforward into the +(UP) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into 2ndgear which is better for smooth drivingaway on a slippery road. Push the selec-tor lever to the -(DOWN) side to shiftback to 1st gear.

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, depress

the brake pedal when shifting from "Neu-tral" position or "Park" position to aforward or reverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in the "ON"position and the brake pedal fully de-pressed in order to move the shift leverfrom the "P" (Park) position to any of theother positions.

o It is always possible to shift from "R","N", "D" position to "P" position. Thevehicle must be fully stopped to avoidtransaxle damage.

Page 146: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

10

C090N03O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"or "N" to any other position with the accelera-tor pedal depressed.

o Never move the gear selector lever into "P"when the vehicle is in motion.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into "R".

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This may be extremely hazard-ous. Always leave the car in gear whenmoving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. Instead,when you are driving down a long hill, slowdown and shift to a lower gear. When you dothis, engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.Otherwise, the lower gear may not be en-gaged.

o Always use the parking brake. Do not de-pend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keepthe car from moving.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.

!

C090I03L-GAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when

the vehicle has completely stopped.o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse

or any of the forward positions with thebrakes applied.

o Always apply the footbrake when shift-ing from "P" or "N", to "R", "D"position.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) position inplace of the parking brake. Always setthe parking brake, shift the transaxleinto "P" (Park) position and turn off theignition when you leave the vehicle, evenmomentarily. Never leave the vehicleunattended while the engine is running.

o Check the automatic transaxle fluid levelregularly, and add fluid as necessary.

o When accelerating from a stop on asteep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-dency to roll backwards. Shifting theshift lever into 2nd gear while in Sportmode will help prevent the vehicle fromrolling backwards.

o See the maintenance schedule for theproper fluid recommendation.

! WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane changes orfast, sharp turns.

o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision crash, un unbelted personis significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seatbelt.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-way speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.o Excessive depressing of the accelerater

pedal in slippery driving conditions suchas pulling out of deep snow or mud maycause severe damage to the transaxle.Rocking the vehicle is not recommended.Rather, use an appropriate towingmethod.

Page 147: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

11GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES

!C130A01A-AAT

WARNING:Nothing should be carried on top of theshelf panel behind the rear seat. If therewere an accident or a sudden stop, suchobjects could move forward and causedamage to the vehicle or injure the occu-pants.

o After being parked, check to be sure theparking brake is not engaged and that theparking brake indicator light is out beforedriving away.

o Driving through water may get the brakeswet. They can also get wet when the car iswashed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakesare wet. Wet brakes cause the car to pull toone side. To dry the brakes, apply thebrakes lightly while driving slowly until thebraking action returns to normal, taking careto keep the car under control at all times. Ifthe braking action does not return to normal,stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call yourHyundai dealer for assistance.

!

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

C120A02A-AAT

(If installed)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designedto prevent wheel lock-up during sudden brakingor on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS con-trol module monitors the wheel speed and con-trols the pressure applied to each brake. Thus,in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABSwill increase vehicle control during braking.

NOTE:During ABS operation, a slight pulsationmay be felt in the brake pedal when thebrakes are applied. Also, a noise may beheard in the engine compartment whilebraking. These conditions are normal andindicate that the anti-lock brake system isfunctioning properly.

WARNING:ABS will not prevent accidents due to im-proper or dangerous driving maneuvers.Even though vehicle control is improvedduring emergency braking, always main-tain a safe distance between you and ob-jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should alwaysbe reduced during extreme road condi-tions.The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system may belonger than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions.During these conditions the vehicle shouldbe driven at reduced speeds.

o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.o With tire chains installed.o Roads where the road surface is pitted or

has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS equippedvehicle should not be tested by high speeddriving or cornering. This could endangerthe safety of yourself or others.

Page 148: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

12

HGK3033-1

o Under some conditions your parking brakecan freeze in the engaged position. This ismost likely to happen when there is anaccumulation of snow or ice around or nearthe rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. Ifthere is a risk that the parking brake mayfreeze, apply it only temporarily while you putthe gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) orin first or reverse gear (manual transaxle)and block the rear wheels so the car cannotroll. Then release the parking brake.

o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade withthe accelerator pedal. This can cause thetransmission to overheat. Always use thebrake pedal or parking brake.

o Don’t coast down hills with the car out of gear.This is extremely hazardous. Keep the carin gear at all times, use the brakes to slowdown, then shift to a lower gear so that enginebraking will help you maintain a safe speed.

o Don’t "ride" the brake pedal. Resting yourfoot on the brake pedal while driving can bedangerous because it can result in the brakesoverheating and losing their effectiveness. Italso increases the wear of the brake com-ponents.

o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, applythe brakes gently and keep the car pointedstraight ahead while you slow down. Whenyou are moving slowly enough for it to be safeto do so, pull off the road and stop in a safeplace.

o If your car is equipped with an automatictransaxle, don’t let your car creep forward.To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot onthe brake pedal when the car is stopped.

o Use caution when parking on a hill. Engagethe parking brake and place the gear selec-tor lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) or in firstor reverse gear (manual transaxle). If yourcar is facing downhill, turn the front wheelsinto the curb to help keep the car from rolling.If your car is facing uphill, turn the frontwheels away from the curb to help keep thecar from rolling. If there is no curb or if it isrequired by other conditions to keep the carfrom rolling, block the wheels.

ELECTRONIC STABILITYPROGRAM (ESP)

C310A01JM-AAT

(If installed)

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) systemis designed to stabilize the vehicle during cor-nering manuevers. ESP checks where you aresteering and where the vehicle is actually going.ESP applies the brakes at individual wheels andintervenes in the engine management systemto stabilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) systemis an electronic system designed to help thedriver maintain vehicle control under adverseconditions. It is not a substitute for safe drivingpractices. Factors including speed, road con-ditions and driver steering input can all affectwhether ESP will be effective in preventing aloss of control. It is still your responsibility todrive and corner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

Page 149: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

13

!

CAUTION:Driving with varying tire or wheel size maycause the ESP system to malfunction. Whenreplacing tires, make sure they are the samesize as your original tires.

!C310B01JM-AAT

ESP ON/OFF Mode

When the ESP is operating, the ESP indicator inthe instrument cluster will blink.If you turn the system off by pressing the ESPswitch, the ESP-OFF indicator will come on andstay on. In the ESP-OFF mode, the stabilitycontrol will be deactivated. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. To turn the system back on, pressthe switch again. The ESP-OFF indicator shouldgo off.

NOTE:The ESP mode will automatically be turnedON after the engine is turned off and re-started.

C310D01JM-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to ON or START but shouldgo out after three seconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, or the ESP orESP-OFF indicator does not go out after 3seconds, have the vehicle checked by anauthorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual conditions in thedevice while driving, ESP-OFF indicator illumi-nates as a warning.If ESP-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your carto a safe place and stop the engine.Then, start the engine again to check if the ESP-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the enginehas been started, have your car checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

WARNING:Electronic stability program is only a driv-ing aid; all normal precautions for drivingin inclement weather and on slippery roadsurfaces should be observed.

Page 150: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

14

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Luggingis driving too slowly in too high a gear result-ing in the engine bucking. If this happens,shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racingthe engine beyond its safe limit. This can beavoided by shifting at the recommendedspeeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The airconditioning system is operated by enginepower so your fuel economy is reducedwhen you use it.

DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

C140A01A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more miles from yourcar if you follow these suggestions:

o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderaterate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruisingspeed. Don't race between stoplights. Try toadjust your speed to that of the other trafficso you don't have to change speeds unnec-essarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-sible. Always maintain a safe distance fromother vehicles so you can avoid unneces-sary braking. This also reduces brake wear.

o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster youdrive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving ata moderate speed, especially on the high-way, is one of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. Thiscan increase fuel consumption and alsoincrease wear on these components. Inaddition, driving with your foot resting on thebrake pedal may cause the brakes to over-heat, which reduces their effectiveness andmay lead to more serious consequences.

o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflatedto the recommended pressure. Incorrectinflation, either too much or too little, resultsin unnecessary tire wear. Check the tirepressures at least once a month.

o Be sure that the wheels are aligned cor-rectly. Improper alignment can result fromhitting curbs or driving too fast over irregularsurfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tirewear and may also result in other problemsas well as greater fuel consumption.

o Keep your car in good condition. For betterfuel economy and reduced maintenancecosts, maintain your car in accordance withthe maintenance schedule in Section 5. Ifyou drive your car in severe conditions,more frequent maintenance is required (seeSection 5 for details).

o Keep your car clean. For maximum service,your Hyundai should be kept clean and freeof corrosive materials. It is especially impor-tant that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed toaccumulate on the underside of the car. Thisextra weight can result in increased fuelconsumption and also contribute to corro-sion.

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your car. Weight reduces fueleconomy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than neces-sary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic),turn off your engine and restart only whenyou're ready to go.

o Remember, your Hyundai does not requireextended warm-up. As soon as the engineis running smoothly, you can drive away. Invery cold weather, however, give your en-gine a slightly longer warm-up period.

Page 151: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

15SMOOTH CORNERING

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,especially when roads are wet. Ideally, cornersshould always be taken under gentle accelera-tion. If you follow these suggestions, tire wearwill be held to a minimum.

WINTER DRIVING

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditions of winterresult in greater wear and other problems. Tominimize the problems of winter driving, youshould follow these suggestions:

C160B01A-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may benecessary to use snow tires or to install tirechains on your tires. If snow tires are needed,it is necessary to select tires equivalent in sizeand type to the original equipment tires. Failureto do so may adversely affect the safety andhandling of your car. Speeding, rapid accelera-tion, sudden brake applications, and sharpturns are potentially very hazardous practices.During deceleration, use engine braking to thefullest extent. Sudden brake applications onsnowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.You need to keep sufficient distance betweenthe vehicle in front and your vehicle. Also, applythe brake gently. It should be noted that installingtire chains on the tire will provide a greaterdriving force, but will not prevent side skids.

NOTE:Tire chains are not legal in all states. Checkstate laws before fitting tire chains.

Page 152: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

16

C160H02A-AAT

Use Approved Window Washer Anti-Freeze in System

To keep the water in the window washer systemfrom freezing, add an approved window washeranti-freeze solution in accordance with instruc-tions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from Hyundai dealers andmost auto parts outlets. Do not use enginecoolant or other types of anti-freeze as thesemay damage the paint finish.

C160I01A-AAT

Don’t Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake canfreeze in the engaged position. This is mostlikely to happen when there is an accumulationof snow or ice around or near the rear brakesor if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk theparking brake may freeze, apply it only tempo-rarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P"(automatic) or in first or reverse gear (manualtransaxle) and block the rear wheels so the carcannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol Cool-ant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high qualityethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. Itis the only type of coolant that should be usedbecause it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-ing system, lubricates the water pump andprevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replen-ish your coolant in accordance with the main-tenance schedule in Section 5. Before winter,have your coolant tested to assure that itsfreezing point is sufficient for the temperaturesanticipated during the winter.

C160D01F-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the batterysystem. Visually inspect the battery and cablesas described in Section 6 (See page 6-23). Thelevel of charge in your battery can be checkedby your Hyundai dealer or a service station.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if Neces-sary

In some climates it is recommended that a lowerviscosity "winter weight" oil be used during coldweather. See Section 9 for recommendations.If you aren’t sure what weight oil you should use,consult your Hyundai dealer.

C160F01F-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and Ignition System

Inspect your spark plugs as described in Sec-tion 6 (See page 6-10) and replace them ifnecessary. Also check all ignition wiring andcomponents to be sure they are not cracked,worn or damaged in any way.

C160G01A-AAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the keyopening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it withan approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. Ifthe lock is frozen internally, you may be able tothaw it out by using a heated key. Handle theheated key with care to avoid injury.

Page 153: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

17HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

C160J01A-AAT

Don’t Let Ice and Snow AccumulateUnderneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can buildup under the fenders and interfere with thesteering. When driving in severe winter condi-tions where this may happen, you should peri-odically check underneath the car to be sure themovement of the front wheels and the steeringcomponents is not obstructed.

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather whereyou drive your car, you should carry appropri-ate emergency equipment. Some of the itemsyou may want to carry include tire chains, towstraps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares,sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

C170A01A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specifica-tion. Low tire inflation pressures will result inoverheating and possible failure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires which mayresult in reduced traction or tire failure.

NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure shown on the tires.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuel thanurban motoring. Do not forget to check bothengine coolant and engine oil.

3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may result inoverheating of the engine.

C180A01A-AAT

Check your lights regularly for correct opera-tion and always keep them clean. When drivingduring the day in conditions of poor visibility, itis helpful to drive with headlights on low beam.This enables you to be seen as well as to see.

USE OF LIGHTS

Page 154: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

18

C190C02S-AAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed andoperating correctly.

NOTE:If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car willrequire more frequent maintenance due tothe additional load. See "Maintenance Un-der Severe Usage Conditions" on page 5-6.

CAUTION:o Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.o When towing a trailer on steep grades (in

excess of 12%) pay close attention to theengine coolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does not overheat. Ifthe needle of the coolant temperaturegauge moves across the dial towards"H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon asit is safe to do so, and allow the engineto idle until it cools down. You mayproceed once the engine has cooledsufficiently.

!

TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING

C190A01S-AAT

If you are considering towing with your car, youshould first check with your State's Departmentof Motor Vehicles to determine their legal re-quirements.Since laws vary from State to State, the require-ments for towing trailers, cars, other types ofvehicles, or apparatus may differ. Ask yourHyundai dealer for further details before towing.

CAUTION:Do not do any towing with your car duringits first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order toallow the engine to properly break in. Fail-ure to heed this caution may result in seri-ous engine or transaxle damage.

!

C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ball combination,making sure that its location is compatible withthat of the trailer or vehicle being towed. Use aquality non-equalizing hitch which distributesthe tongue load uniformly throughout the chas-sis.

The hitch should be bolted securely to the carand installed by a qualified technician. DO NOTUSE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARYINSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THATATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.

Page 155: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

19

C190D01S-AAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection between yourvechile and the trailer or vehicle you are towingfail, the trailer or vehicle could wander danger-ously across other lanes of traffic and ultimatelyleave the roadway. To eliminate this potentiallydangerous situation, safety chains, attachedbetween your car and the trailer or towedvehicle, are required in most states.

C190E02GK-AAT

Trailer Weight Limit

C190E01L

Tongue load Total trailer weight

Tongue loads can be increased or decreasedby redistributing the load in the trailer.This can be verified by checking the total weightof the loaded trailer and then checking the loadon the tongue.

NOTE:1. Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front. About 60% ofthe trailer load should be in the front halfon the trailer and the remaining 40% inthe rear.

2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailermust not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) shown on thevehicle identification plate (see page 8-1). The total gross vehicle weight is thecombined weight of the vehicle, driver,all passengers and their luggage, cargo,hitch, trailer tongue load and other op-tional equipment.

3. The front or rear axle weight must notexceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identifi-cation plate (see page 8-2). It is possiblethat your towing package does not ex-ceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.Improper trailer loading and/or too muchluggage in the trunk can overload therear axle. Redistribute the load and checkthe axle weight again.

C190E02L

Gross axle weight Gross vehicle weight

Page 156: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

20

(automatic). In addition, place wheel chocksat each of the trailer's tires.

9. If the trailer has electric brakes, start yourvehicle and trailer moving, and then apply thetrailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets you checkyour electrical connection at the same time.

10.During your trip, occasionally check to besure that the load is secure, and that thelights and any trailer brakes are still working.

11.Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration orsudden stops.

12.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes.13.Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the brakesto overheat, resulting in reduced brakingefficiency.

14.When going down a hill, shift into a lower gearand use the engine braking effect.When ascending a long grade, downshift thetransaxle to a lower gear and reduce speedto reduce chances of engine overloadingand/or overheating.

15.If you have to stop while going uphill, do nothold the vehicle in place by pressing on theaccelerator. This can cause the automatictransaxle to overheat. Use the parking brakeor footbrake.

NOTE:When towing check transaxle fluid morefrequently.

CAUTION:The following specifications are recom-mended when towing a trailer. The loadedtrailer weight cannot safely exceed the val-ues in the chart below.

!

! WARNING:o Improperly loading your vehicle and

trailer can seriously affect its steeringand braking performance causing acrash which could cause serious injuryor death.

o Towing a trailer affected vehicle han-dling and braking.

o Drive more slowly when towing a trailerand allow more distance when braking.

o Be careful when driving in slippery andwindy conditions.

o Be careful when turning and while driv-ing up and down hills.

Lbs. (kg)

Maximum Towable Weight

Trailer

1000 (453)

Tongue

100 (45)

C190F01S-AAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chainconnections as well as proper operation ofthe trailer running lights, brake lights, andturn signals.

2. Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed. (Less than 60 mph)

3. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalconditions.

4. To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do not usefifth gear (manual transaxle) or overdrive(automatic transaxle).

5. Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

6. Check the condition and air pressure of alltires on the trailer and your car. Low tirepressure can seriously affect the handling.Also check the spare tire.

7. The vehicle/trailer combination is more af-fected by crosswind and buffeting.When being passed by a large vehicle, keepa constant speed and steer straight ahead.If there is too much wind buffeting, slow downto get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.

8. When parking your car and trailer, especiallyon a hill, be sure to follow all the normalprecautions. Turn your front wheel into thecurb, set the parking brake firmly, and put thetransaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park

Page 157: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

21

CAUTION:If overheating should occur when towing,(the temperature gauge reads near red zone),taking the following action may reduce oreliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.2. Reduce highway speed.3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.4. While in stop and go traffic, place the

gear selector in park or neutral and idlethe engine at a higher speed.

!

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

C190F01JM-AAT

Tire and Loading Information Label

I030B01GK

The tire label located on the driver'sside of the center pillar outer panelgives the original tire size, cold tirepressures recommended for your ve-hicle, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit(1)Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX pounds'' on yourvehicle's placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX pounds.

(4)The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

Page 158: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

22

C190F02JM

Example 2

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

750 lbs

(340 kg)

650 lbs

(295 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) x 5

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

A B C

C190F01JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

300 lbs

(136 kg)

1100 lbs

(498 kg)

Example 1

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2

Available Cargo and

Luggage weight

(5)Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

A B C

Page 159: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

23

C190F03JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

860 lbs

(390 kg)

540 lbs

(245 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

172 lbs (68 kg) x 5

Available Cargo Weight

Example 3 Refer to your vehicle's tire and loadinginformation label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle's capacity weightand seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers andcargo should never exceed yourvehicle's capacity weight.

A B C

C190G01JM-AAT

Compliance Label

The compliance label is located on thedriver's side of the center piller outerpanel.

The label shows the size of your originaltires and the inflation pressures neededto obtain the gross weight capacity ofyour vehicle. This is called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of the ve-hicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

C190G01JM

Page 160: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

24

!WARNING:

Items you carry inside your vehiclecan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

o Put things in the cargo area ofyour vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

o Never stack items, like suitcases,inside the vehicle above the topsof the seats.

o Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

o When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secure it.

o Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

!

This label also tells you the maximumweights that can be supported by thefront and rear axles, called Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh stationand weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread outyour load equally on both sides of thecenterline.

NOTE:o Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Donot overload your vehicle.

o Using heavier suspension com-ponents to get added durabilitymight not change your weight rat-ings. Ask your dealer to help youload your vehicle the right way.

The label will help you decide how muchcargo and installed equipment yourvehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle –like suitcases, tools, packages, or any-thing else – they more as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, the itemswill keep going and can cause an injuryif they strikes the driver or a passenger.

WARNING:o Never exceed the GVWR for your

vehicle, or the GAWR for either thefront or rear axle.

o Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR, or eitherthe maximum front or rear GAWR.If you do, parts on your vehiclecan break, and it can change theway your vehicle handles. Thiscould cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

Page 161: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

If the Engine will not Start .............................................. 3-2Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-5If You Have a Flat Tire .................................................. 3-6Changing a Flat Tire ...................................................... 3-6If Your Vehicle Must be Towed ................................... 3-11Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-13If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-14

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

33

Page 162: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

32

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

!D010A01A-AAT D010B02A-AAT

If Engine Doesn’t Turn Over or TurnsOver Slowly

D010C02Y-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally but DoesNot Start

1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check all

connectors at ignition, coils and spark plugs.Reconnect any that may be disconnected orloose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine compart-ment.

4. If the engine still does not to start, call aHyundai dealer or seek other qualified assis-tance.

D010D01A-AAT

If the Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping astraight line. Move cautiously off the road toa safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle

will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer orseek other qualified assistance.

WARNING:If the engine will not start, do not push orpull the car to start it. This could result in acollision or cause other damage. In addi-tion, push or pull starting may cause thecatalytic converter to be overloaded andcreate a fire hazard.

1. If your car has an automatic transaxle, besure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P"and the emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be surethey are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims orgoes out when you operate the starter, thebattery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to be surethey are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Seeinstructions for "Jump Starting".

D010B01GK

Page 163: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3JUMP STARTING

!o To jump start a car with a discharged battery,

follow this procedure exactly:

1. If the booster battery is installed in anothervehicle, be sure the two vehicles are nottouching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and acces-sories in both vehicles.

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in theexact location shown on the previous page.First, attach one clamp of the jumper cableto the positive (+) post or cable of the dis-charged battery. Then attach the other endof the same cable to the positive (+) post orcable of the booster battery. Next, using theother cable, attach one clamp to the negative(-) post or cable of the booster battery. Thenattach the other end of that cable to a solidmetal part of the engine of the vehicle with thedischarged battery away from the battery.Do not connect the cable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with the boosterbattery and let it run for a few minutes. Thiswill help to assure that the booster battery isfully charged. During the jumping operation,run the engine in this vehicle at about 2,000rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with the dis-charged battery using the normal startingprocedure. After the engine starts, leave thejumper cables connected and let the enginerun at fast idle or about 2000 rpm for severalminutes.

D020A03A-AAT

WARNING:The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Ifthese instructions are not followed exactly,serious personal injury and damage to thevehicle may occur! If you are not sure howto follow this procedure, seek qualifiedassistance. Automobile batteries containsulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highlycorrosive. When jump starting, wear pro-tective glasses and be careful not to getacid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.

o If you should accidentally get acid on yourskin or in your eyes, immediately removeany contaminated clothing and flush the areawith clear water for at least 15 minutes. Thenpromptly obtain medical attention. If youmust be transported to an emergency facil-ity, continue to apply water to the affectedarea with a sponge or cloth.

o The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Donot smoke or allow a spark or an open flamein the vicinity.

o The battery being used to provide the jumpstart must be 12-volt. If you cannot deter-mine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attemptto use it for the jump start.

2.0L

HGK4001

HGK4002

Dis-chargedbattery

2.7L

Booster battery

Dis-chargedbattery

Booster battery

Page 164: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

34

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

!

! WARNING:While the engine is running, keep hair,hands, and clothing away from movingparts such as the fan and drive belts toprevent injury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken orengine coolant is leaking out, stop the engineimmediately and call the nearest Hyundaidealer for assistance.

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. This can allow coolant to beblown out of the opening and cause seri-ous burns.

D030A02A-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates overheat-ing, you experience a loss of power, or hear loudpinging or knocking and the engine is probablytoo hot. If this happens and, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safeto do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (auto-matic), or neutral (manual transaxle) and setthe parking brake. If the air conditioning is on,turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the caror steam is coming out from the hood, stopthe engine. Do not open the hood until theengine coolant has stopped running or thesteaming has stopped. If there is no visibleloss of engine coolant and no steam, leavethe engine running and check to be sure theengine cooling fan is operating. If the fan isnot running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt ismissing. If it is not missing, check to see thatit is tight. If the drive belt seems to besatisfactory, check for engine coolant leak-ing from the radiator, hoses or under the car.(If the air conditioning had been in use, it isnormal for cold water to be draining from itwhen you stop).

6. Carefully remove the jumper cables in thereverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your battery becamedischarged (because the lights were left on,etc.), have the charging system checked byyour Hyundai dealer.

Page 165: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

5SPARE TIRE

!

6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheat-ing, wait until the engine temperature hasreturned to normal. Then, if the engine cool-ant has been lost, carefully add water to thereservoir (Page 6-8) to bring the fluid level inthe reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for fur-ther signs of overheating. If overheatinghappens again, call a Hyundai dealer forassistance.

CAUTION:Serious loss of engine coolant indicatesthere is a leak in the cooling system and thisshould be checked as soon as possible bya Hyundai dealer.

D040A02GK-AAT

TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE

The following instructions for the tem-porary spare tire should be observed:

1. Check inflation pressure as soon aspractical after installing the sparetire, and adjust to the specified pres-sure. The tire pressure should beperiodically checked and maintainedat the specified pressure while thetire is stored.

Tire Size

Inflation Pressure

T125/70 R16

420 kPa(60 psi)

4. As the temporary spare tire is spe-cifically designed for your car, itshould not be used on any othervehicle.

5. The temporary spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the temporary spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car componentsmay occur.

6. The temporary spare tire pressureshould be checked once a monthwhile the tire is stored.

2. The spare tire should only be usedtemporarily and should be returnedto the luggage compartment as soonas the original tire can be repaired orreplaced.

3. Continuous use at speeds of over 50mph (80 km/h) is not recommended.

Spare Tire Pressure

CAUTION:o Do not use snow chains with your

temporary spare tire.o Do not use more than one tempo-

rary spare tire at a time.o Do not tow a trailer while the tem-

porary spare tire is installed.

!

Page 166: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

36

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CHANGING A FLAT TIREIF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D060A02A-AAT

The procedure described on the follow-ing pages can be used to rotate tires aswell as to change a flat tire. Whenpreparing to change a flat tire, check tobe sure the gear selector lever is in "P"(automatic transaxle) or reverse gear(manual transaxle) and that the parkingbrake is set, then:

D060A01GK

D050A01A-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal and let the car slow down whiledriving straight ahead. Do not applythe brakes immediately or attempt topull off the road as this may cause aloss of control. When the car hasslowed to such a speed that it is safeto do so, brake carefully and pull offthe road. Drive off the road as far aspossible and park on firm, levelground. If you are on a divided high-way, do not park in the median areabetween the two traffic lanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn on youremergency hazard flashers, set theparking brake and put the transaxlein "P" (automatic) or reverse (manualtransaxle).

3. Have all passengers get out of the car.Be sure they all get out on the side ofthe car that is away from traffic.

4. Change the tire following the instruc-tions provided on the following pages.

D040B01A-AAT

Handling the Spare Tire

Remove the installation bolt to removethe spare tire. To replace the spare tirein its storage compartment, tighten thebolt firmly with your fingers until there isno more play in the spare tire.

HGK4010

Page 167: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

7

D060B02GK-AAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

Remove the spare tire and remove thejack and tool bag from the trunk.

HGK4008The jack is located behind the right sideof luggage trim. Remove the jack coverby unscrewing the bolts. Turn the jackend counterclockwise to lower the jackheight by using a screw driver or wrenchbar and remove it from the bracket.

HGK4009

D060C01A-AAT

2. Block the Wheel

Block the wheel that is diagonally oppo-site from the flat to keep the vehiclefrom rolling when the car is raised on thejack.

HGK4011

Flat tire

Page 168: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

38

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in Place

The base of the jack should be placedon firm, level ground. The jack shouldbe positioned as shown in the drawing.

D060F02E-AAT

5. Raising the Car

After inserting a bar into the wheel nutwrench, install the bar into the jack asshown in the drawing. To raise thevehicle, turn the jack handle clockwise.As the jack begins to raise the vehicle,double check that it is properly posi-tioned and will not slip. If the jack is onsoft ground or sand, place a board,brick, flat stone or other object underthe base of the jack to keep it fromsinking.

HGK4012 HFC4022

Wrench bar

Wheel nutwrench

D060D02A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. To loosenthe nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-terclockwise. When doing this, be surethat the socket is seated completelyover the nut so it cannot slip off. Formaximum leverage, position the wrenchso the handle is to the left as shown inthe drawing. Then, while holding thewrench near the end of the handle, pushdown on it with steady pressure. Do notremove the nuts at this time. Justloosen them about one-half turn.

HGK4013

Page 169: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

9

!WARNING:

Do not get under the car when it issupported by the jack! This is verydangerous as the jack could fall andcause serious injury or death. Noone should stay in the car while thejack is being used.

D060G02Y-AAT

6. Changing Wheels

Loosen the wheel nuts and removethem with your fingers. Slide the wheeloff the studs and lay it flat so it cannotroll away. To put the wheel on the hub,pick up the spare tire, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheel ontothem. If this is difficult, tip the wheelslightly and get the top hole in the wheellined up with the top stud. Then jigglethe wheel back and forth until the wheelcan be slid over the other studs.

HGK4031

Raise the car high enough so that thefully inflated spare tire can be installed.To do this, you will need more groundclearance than is required to removethe flat tire.

!WARNING:

Wheels and wheel covers may havesharp edges. Handle them carefullyto avoid possible severe injury. Be-fore putting the wheel into place, besure that there is nothing on the hubor wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,etc.) that interferes with the wheelfrom fitting solidly against the hub. Ifthere is, remove it. If there is notgood contact on the mounting sur-face between the wheel and hub, the

D060G02GK

Page 170: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

310

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

D060I01E-AAT

8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts

Lower the car to the ground by turningthe wheel nut wrench counterclock-wise. Then position the wrench as shownin the drawing and tighten the wheelnuts. Be sure the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut. Do not stand

HGK4014

D060H02Y-AAT

7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

To reinstall the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on the studsand tighten them finger tight. The nutsshould be installed with their small di-

D060H01GK

wheel nuts could come loose andcause the loss of a wheel. Loss of awheel may result in loss of control ofthe vehicle. This may cause seriousinjury or death.

ameter ends directed inward. Jiggle thetire to be sure it is completely seated,then tighten the nuts as much as pos-sible with your fingers again.

on the wrench handle or use an exten-sion pipe over the wrench handle.Go around the wheel tightening everyother nut until they are all tight. Thendouble-check each nut for tightness.After changing wheels, have a techni-cian tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100kg.cm)

Page 171: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

11

D060J01FC-GAT

After Changing Wheels

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure. Ifthe pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the correctpressure. If it is too high, adjust it untilit is correct. Always reinstall the valvecap after checking or adjusting tirepressure. If the cap is not replaced, airmay leak from the tire. If you lose avalve cap, buy another and install it assoon as possible.

HGK4032

After you have changed wheels, al-ways secure the flat tire in its place inthe luggage compartment and returnthe jack and tools to their proper stor-age locations.

IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BETOWED

D080A01O-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be doneby your Hyundai dealer or a commercial towtruck service. This will help assure that yourvehicle is not damaged in towing. Also, profes-sionals are generally aware of local laws gov-erning towing. In any case, rather than riskdamage to your car, it is suggested that youshow this information to the tow truck operator.Be sure that a safety chain system is used andthat all local laws are observed.It is recommended that your vehicle be towedwith a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipmentwith all the wheels off the ground.

! CAUTION:o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed

incorrectly!o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral.o When the engine will not start, be sure

the steering is unlocked by placing thekey in the "ACC" position.

Page 172: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

312

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

D080B01O-GAT

Towing the Vehicle

HGK4030

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift typetruck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).

1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rearwheels on the ground, be sure the parkingbrake is released.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of the auto-matic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT"range on the dipstick, add fluid. If youcannot add fluid, a towing dolly must beused.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspensioncomponents are damaged or the vehicle isbeing towed with the front wheels on theground, use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.

o Manual Transaxle:If you do not use a towing dolly, place theignition key in the "ACC" position and put thetransaxle in "N (Neutral)".

1)

2)

3) dolly

!

HGK4016

CAUTION:o When towing the vehicle, take care not to

cause damage to the bumper or under-body of the vehicle.

o Do not tow with sling type truck as thismay cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle. CAUTION:

Do not tow with the key removed or in the"LOCK" position when towing from therear without a towing dolly.

!

Page 173: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

13

!

HGK4017

CAUTION:

A vehicle with an automatic transaxle shouldnever be towed from the rear with the frontwheels on the ground. This can cause se-rious damage to the transaxle. Be sure touse a towing dolly under the front wheels.

EMERGENCY TOWING

D080D02A-AAT

For emergency towing when no commercialtow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable,chain or strap to one of the towing hooks underthe front /rear of your car. Do not attempt to towyour vehicle in this manner on any unpavedsurface. This could result in serious damage toyour car.Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels,drive train, axles, steering or brakes are dam-aged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is inneutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engineoff) or in the "ON" position (with the enginerunning). A driver must be in the towed car tosteer it and operate the brakes.

HGK4018

Front

Rear

! CAUTION:o If the car is being towed with all four

wheels on the ground, it can be towedonly from the front. Be sure that thetransaxle is in neutral. Do not tow atspeeds greater than 30 mph (50 km/h)and for more than 15 miles (25 km).

o Be sure the steering is unlocked by plac-ing the key in the "ACC" position. Adriver must be in the towed vehicle tooperate the steering and brakes.

o Automatic Transaxle:Be sure to use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.

3) It is recommended that your vehicle betowed with all the wheels off the ground.

Page 174: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

314

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A01A-AAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealerscan make you a new key if you have your keynumber.If you lock the keys inside your car and youcannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai dealerscan use special tools to open the door for you.

Page 175: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

4Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-2Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-3Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-5

4

Page 176: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keepyour car clean and free of corrosive materials.Attention to the underside of the car is particu-larly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area — whereroad salts are used, near the ocean, areaswith industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, youshould take extra care to prevent corrosion.In winter, hose off the underside of your carat least once a month and be sure to cleanthe underside thoroughly when winter isover.

o When cleaning underneath the car, giveparticular attention to the components underthe fenders and other areas that are hiddenfrom view. Do a thorough job; just dampeningthe accumulated mud rather than washing itaway will accelerate corrosion rather thanprevent it. Water under high pressure andsteam are particularly effective in removingaccumulated mud and corrosive materials.

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from gettingstarted by observing the following:

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corro-sion is most likely to occur. For example, cor-rosion is accelerated by high humidity, particu-larly when temperatures are just above freez-ing. In such conditions, the corrosive material iskept in contact with the car surfaces by mois-ture that is slow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slowto dry and holds moisture in contact with thevehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, itcan still retain the moisture and promote corro-sion.High temperatures can also accelerate corro-sion of parts that are not properly ventilated sothe moisture can be dispersed. For all thesereasons, it is particularly important to keep yourcar clean and free of mud or accumulations ofother materials. This applies not only to thevisible surfaces but particularly to the undersideof the car.

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularlyexposed to corrosive materials, corrosion pro-tection is particularly important. Some of thecommon causes of accelerated corrosion areroad salts, dust control chemicals, ocean airand industrial pollution.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on yourcar are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed toaccumulate underneath the car.

o Removal of paint or protective coatings bystones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapesand dents which leave unprotected metalexposed to corrosion.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai fromCorrosion

By using the most advanced design and con-struction practices to combat corrosion,Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality,However, this is only part of the job. To achievethe long-term corrosion resistance yourHyundai can deliver, the owner’s cooperationand assistance is also required.

TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION

Page 177: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

3WASHING AND WAXING

E020E01A-AAT

Don’t Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats andcarpeting to cause corrosion. Check under themats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, clean-ing materials or chemicals in the car.These should be carried only in proper contain-ers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up,flushed with clear water and thoroughly dried.

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don’t park your car in a damp, poorly ventilatedgarage. This creates a favorable environmentfor corrosion. This is particularly true if youwash your car in the garage or drive it into thegarage when it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contrib-ute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated somoisture is dispersed.

E030A01GK-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai

Never wash your car when the surface is hotfrom being in the sun. Always wash your car inthe shade.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive andcan scratch the paint if it is not removed. Airpollution or acid rain may damage the paint andtrim through chemical action if pollutants areallowed to remain in contact with the surface. Ifyou live near the ocean or in an area where roadsalts or dust control chemicals are used, youshould pay particular attention to the undersideof the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dustand loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driventhrough mud or muddy water, be sure to thor-oughly clean the underside as well. Use a harddirect stream of water to remove accumulationsof mud or corrosive materials. High pressurecar washes may cause water to enter yourvehicle. Use a good quality car-washing solu-tion and follow the manufacturer's directions onthe package. These are available at yourHyundai dealer or auto parts outlet. Don't usestrong household detergents, gasoline, strongsolvents or abrasive cleaning powders as thesemay damage the finish.Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequentlyand don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard.For stubborn spots, dampen them frequentlyand remove them a little at a time.

o When cleaning lower door panels, rockerpanels and frame members, be sure thatdrain holes are kept open so that moisturecan escape and not be trapped inside to ac-celerate corrosion.

E020D02A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon as pos-sible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. Ifbare metal is showing through, the attention ofa qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly cor-rosive and may damage painted surfaces in justa few hours. Always remove bird droppings assoon as possible.

Page 178: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

4

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the car again whenwater no longer beads on a clean surface butspreads out over a larger area.

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car before polishingor waxing or using a combination cleaner andwax. Use a good quality commercial productand follow the manufacturer’s directions on thecontainer. Polish and wax the bright trim piecesas well as the paint.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don’t use gasoline, strong solvents or corro-sive cleaning agents. These can damage thefinish of the car. To remove road tar, useturpentine on a clean, soft cloth or commerciallyavailable bug and tar remover. Be gentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warmwater and mild soap or car-washing solution.Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lostits luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.

If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint,use touch-up paint to cover them to preventcorrosion. To protect the paintwork of the caragainst corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai(at least once a month). Give special attentionto the removal of salt, mud and other sub-stances on the underside of the splashboardsof the car. Make sure that the outlets and theunderside of the doors are open. Paint damagecan be caused by small accumulation of tar,industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects andbird droppings, when not removed immediately.If water alone is not strong enough to remove theaccumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solu-tion. Be sure to rinse the surface after washingto remove the solution. Never allow the solutionto dry on the painted surfaces.

To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush orsoapy steel-wool scouring pad.To clean plastic wheel covers, use a cleansponge or soft cloth and water.

To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mildsoap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasivecleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces bycleaning, polishing and waxing. Because alumi-num is subject to corrosion, be sure to givealuminum alloy wheels special attention in win-ter. If you drive on salted roads, clean thewheels thoroughly afterwards.

After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. Ifsoapy water dries on the finish, streaking willresult.

When the weather is warm and the humidity low,you may find it necessary to rinse each sectionimmediately after washing to avoid streaking.

After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamoisor soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for dryingthe car is to remove water from the car so it willdry without water spots. Don't rub, this candamage the finish.

Page 179: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

5CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E040B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery(If Installed)

In the normal course of use, leather upholsteredsurfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust anddirt. This dust and dirt must be cleanedoff or it may work into the surface of the leather,causing damage.

Fine leather needs care, and should be cleanedwhen necessary. Washing leather thoroughlywith soap and water will keep your leatherlustrous, beautiful and ensure you have manyyears of wear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any mildsoap and lukewarm water, work up a goodlather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipe cleanwith a slightly damp cloth and dry with soft cloth.Do this as often as the leather becomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficient oils areincorporated through processing that none needbe applied during the life of the leather. Oilapplied to the finished surface will in no way helpthe leather and may do more harm than good.Varnishes and furniture polishes should neverbe used under any conditions.

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loosedirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then applya solution of mild soap or detergent and waterusing a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this tostay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipewith a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirtstains are not removed, repeat this procedureuntil the upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso-line, solvent, paint thinner or other strong clean-ers.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed to pre-serve the appearance of the bumpers on yourHyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte orhydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If youdo, wash it off immediately with clear water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper sur-faces. They are made of soft plastic and thesurface can be damaged if mistreated. Donot use abrasive cleaners. Use warm waterand mild soap or car-washing solution.

o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-peratures. For example, if you have your carrepainted, do not leave the bumpers on thecar if the car is going to be placed in a high-temperature paint booth.

Page 180: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

6 ANY QUESTIONS?

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or spongewith mild soap or detergent and warm water. Donot use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abra-sive materials on the seat belts as this mayweaken the fabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them for ex-cessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs ofdamage and replace them if necessary.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners ofthis type are available in aerosol cans in liquidform or powder. Read the instructions andfollow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleanerwith the appropriate attachment, remove asmuch dirt from the carpets as possible. Applythe foam following the manufacturer’s direc-tions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not addwater. These cleaners work best when thecarpet is kept as dry as possible.

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about the care of yourcar, consult your Hyundai dealer.

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household window cleaner onthe windows. However, when cleaning the in-side of the rear window be careful not to damagethe rear window defroster wiring.

Page 181: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance ................................................ 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7

5

Page 182: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2

F010D01A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you should per-form when you drive your Hyundai or you fill thefuel tank. A list of these items will be found onpage 6-4.

F010C01A-AAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such as inspections,adjustments and replacements that are listed inthe maintenance charts starting on page 5-4.These procedures must be performed at theintervals shown in the maintenance schedule toassure that your warranty remains in effect.Although it is strongly recommended that theybe performed by the trained technicians at yourHyundai dealer, these procedures may be per-formed at any qualified service facility.It is suggested that genuine Hyundai serviceparts be used for any required repairs or re-placements. Other parts of equivalent qualitysuch as engine oil, engine coolant, manual orauto transaxle oil, brake fluid and so on whichare not supplied by Hyundai Motor Company orits distributor may be used without affectingyour warranty coverage but you should alwaysbe sure these are equivalent to the quality of theoriginal Hyundai parts. Your Owner's Hand-book provides further information about yourwarranty coverage.

F010A01A-AAT

Service Requirements

To ensure that you receive the greatest numberof miles of satisfying operation from your Hyundai,certain maintenance procedures must be per-formed. Although careful design and engineer-ing have reduced these to a minimum, those thatare required are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have these mainte-nance procedures performed to comply withthe terms of the warranties covering your newHyundai. The Owner's Handbook supplied withyour new vehicle provides further informationabout these warranties.

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for your Hyundaican be divided into three main areas:

o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a few toolsthat are required and want to take the time to doso, you can inspect and service a number ofitems. For more information about doing it your-self, see Section 6.

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

Page 183: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

3SCHEDULED MAINTENANCEREQUIREMENTS

F020A02S-AAT

o Inspection should be performed any time amalfunction is experienced or suspected.

o Receipts for all emission control systemservices should be retained to demonstratecompliance with conditions of the emissionssystem warranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000km), continue to follow the prescribed main-tenance intervals.

o For severe usage maintenance require-ments, see page 5-6 of this section.

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced,keep copies of the service records in yourglovebox. This will help ensure that you candocument that the required procedures havebeen performed to keep your warranties ineffect. This is especially important whenservice is not performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o If you choose to do your own maintenanceand repairs, you may find it helpful to havean official Hyundai Shop Manual. A copy ofthis publication may be purchased at yourHyundai dealer's parts department.

Page 184: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

F030B03GK-AAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

DESCRIPTION

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED)

SPARK PLUGS (IRIDIUM COATED)

VALVE CLEARENCE (2.0 L)

FUEL TANK AIRFILTER

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

R

15

24

12

R

I

I

22.5

36

18

R

30

48

24

R

I

I

R

R

37.5

60

30

R

R

45

72

36

R

I

I

52.5

84

42

R

I

60

96

48

R

I

I

R

R

I

R

67.5

108

54

R

75

120

60

R

R

I

I

82.5

132

66

R

90

144

72

R

I

I

R

R

97.5

156

78

R

R

105

168

84

R

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

R

R

120

192

96

R

I

I

R

R

I

R

127.5

204

102

R

135

216

108

R

I

I

142.5

228

114

R

150

240

120

R

R

I

I

R

R

F030A01A-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission servicesto protect your emission warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

Page 185: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5

Note :*1 - FOR EVERY 12 MONTHS OR 10,000 MILES (15,000 KM), WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"

F030C02GK-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

DESCRIPTION

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT (WATER PUMP, GENERATOR AND A/CON)

COOLANT

TIMING BELT

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID & CLUTCH FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/LOWER ARM

BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR BLOWER UNIT)

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

I

15

24

12

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

I

30

48

24

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

37.5

60

30

I

45

72

36

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

I

60

96

48

I

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

67.5

108

54

I

75

120

60

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

I

90

144

72

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

97.5

156

78

I

105

168

84

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

I

120

192

96

I

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

127.5

204

102

I

135

216

108

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

142.5

228

114

I

150

240

120

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

SEE NOTE *1

Page 186: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

F040A03GK-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriatemaintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS/PADS,

PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR BLOWER UNIT)

MAINTENANCE ITEM

R

R

R

I

I

I

I

R

R

R

EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)

EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)

MORE FREQUENTLY

DRIVINGCONDITION

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCEOPERATION

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

C, E

B, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G

C, D, E, F, G

A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

A, C, E, F, G, H, I

C, E

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatly driving short distance of less than 5miles(8km) in normal temperature or less than 10miles(16km) in freezing temperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distancesC - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold

weather

E - Driving in sandy areasF - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F(32°C)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towingJ - Driving over 100 MPH(170 Km/h)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

Page 187: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

7

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses andConnections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Have a trainedtechnician replace any damaged or leakingparts immediately.

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenance sched-ule. If the car is being driven in severe condi-tions, more frequent oil and filter changes arerequired.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which thevehicle may be driven, damage the emissionsystem and cause hard starting. If an exces-sive amount of foreign matter accumulates inthe fuel tank, the filter may require replacementmore frequently.After installing a new filter, run the engine forseveral minutes, and check for leaks at theconnections. Fuel filters should be installed bytrained technicians.

F060F02A-AAT

o Crankcase Ventilation Hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence ofheat and/or mechanical damage. Hard andbrittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions,and excessive swelling indicate deterioration.Particular attention should be paid to examinethose hose surfaces nearest to high heatsources, such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure that thehoses do not come in contact with any heatsource, sharp edges or moving componentwhich might cause heat damage or mechanicalwear. Inspect all hose connections, such asclamps and couplings, to make sure they aresecure, and that no leaks are present. Hosesshould be replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

F060H01A-AAT

o Air cleaner filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recom-mended when the filter is replaced.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should beinspected at those intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. Make sure that a newvapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly re-placed.

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of thecorrect heat range.

F060N02E-AAT

o Valve Clearance (2.0L)

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or enginevibration and adjust if necessary. A qualifiedtechnician should perform the operation.

Page 188: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

8

F060B02A-AAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation andreplace if necessary. Drive belts should bechecked periodically for proper tension andadjusted as necessary.

F070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervalsspecified in the maintenance schedule.

F060E01A-AAT

o Timing belt

Inspect all parts related to the timing belt fordamage and deformation. Replace any dam-aged parts immediately.

F070D01A-AAT

o Manual transaxle oil

Inspect the manual transaxle oil according tothe maintenance schedule.

NOTE:If the oil level is low, check for possible leaksbefore adding oil. Do not overfill.

F070G03A-AAT

o Brake Fluid & Clutch Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reser-voir. The level should be between "MIN" and"MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Useonly hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3or DOT 4.

F070H01A-AAT

o Rear Brake Drums and Linings/Parking Brake

Check the rear brake drums and linings forscoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brakesystem including the parking brake lever andcables. For detailed service procedures, referto the Shop Manual.

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing,cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replaceany deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-ately.

F070E06A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

The fluid level should be in the “HOT” range ofthe dipstick, after the engine and transaxle areat normal operating temperature. Check theautomatic transaxle fluid level with the enginerunning and the transaxle in neutral, with theparking brake properly applied. Use HYUNDAIGENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SKATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP IIIspecification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.when adding or changing fluid. Using the wrongATF may result in damage to the ATM.

Page 189: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

9

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs forrun out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler andhangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage.Start the engine and listen carefully for anyexhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections orreplace parts as necessary.

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections for loose-ness or damage. Retighten to the specifiedtorque.

F070M01A-AAT

o Steering gear box, linkage &boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, checkfor excessive free-play in the steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or damage. Checkthe dust boots and ball joints for deterioration,cracks, or damage. Replace any damagedparts.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt and Hoses

Check the power steering pump and hoses forleakage and damage. Replace any damaged orleaking parts immediately. Inspect the powersteering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, ex-cessive wear, oiliness and proper tension.Replace or adjust it if necessary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Drive Shafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps forcracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace anydamaged parts and, if necessary, repack thegrease.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Check air con-ditioning performance according to the relevantshop manual if necessary.

Page 190: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

6Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2General Checks ............................................................ 6-4Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-5Changing the Oil and Filter ............................................ 6-6Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-7Spark Plugs ................................................................ 6-10Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ................................... 6-12Checking the Transaxle Oil (manual) ......................... 6-14Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-15Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-17Checking the Clutch Fluid ........................................... 6-19Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-19Checking Drive Belts .................................................. 6-23Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-24Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-26Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-28Headlight Aiming Adjustment ...................................... 6-29Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-30Bulb Wattage............................................................... 6-39Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-40

6

Page 191: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010B01GK-GAT

(2.0 DOHC CVVT)

HGK5002

1. Engine oil filler cap2. Brake booster3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Clutch fluid reservoir (If installed)

5. Relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Engine coolant reservoir9. Engine oil level dipstick

10.Radiator cap11.Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick

(If installed)12.Air cleaner13.Battery

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing the engine,you should handle tools and other heavyobjects carefully so that the plastic rockercover of the engine is not damaged.

!

Page 192: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3

G010C01GK-GAT

(2.7 V6)

HGK5001

1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Brake booster3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Air Cleaner

5. Relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap7. Engine coolant reservoir8. Engine oil level dipstick9. Radiator cap

10.Engine oil filler cap11.Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick

(If installed)12.Battery

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing the engine,you should handle tools and other heavyobjects carefully so that the plastic rockercover of the engine is not damaged.

!

Page 193: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

4 GENERAL CHECKS

G020C01A-AAT

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked each timewhen the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operationo Windshield wiper operationo Horn operationo Defroster, heating system operation (and air

conditioning, if installed)o Steering operation and conditiono Mirror condition and operationo Turn signal operationo Accelerator pedal operationo Brake operation, including parking brakeo Manual transaxle operation, including clutch

operationo Automatic transaxle operation, including

"Park" mechanism operationo Seat control condition and operationo Seat belt condition and operationo Sunvisor operation

If you notice anything that does not operatecorrectly or appears to be functioning incor-rectly, inspect it carefully and seek assistancefrom your Hyundai dealer if service is needed.

G020B01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checked monthly:

o Overall appearance and conditiono Wheel condition and wheel nut torqueo Exhaust system conditiono Light condition and operationo Windshield glass conditiono Wiper blade conditiono Paint condition and body corrosiono Fluid leakso Door and hood lock conditiono Tire pressure and condition (including spare

tire)

G020A01A-AAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regularly:

o Engine oil level and conditiono Transaxle fluid level and conditiono Brake fluid levelo Clutch fluid levelo Engine coolant levelo Windshield washer fluid levelo Accessory drive belt conditiono Engine coolant hose conditiono Fluid leaks (on or below components)o Power steering fluid levelo Battery conditiono Air filter condition

Page 194: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

5

!

G030C02A-AAT

To Check the Oil Level

HGK5004

2.0L 2.7L

Before checking the oil, warm up the engine tothe normal operating temperature and be sureyour car is parked on level ground. Turn theengine off.Wait 5 minutes, then remove the dipstick, wipeit off, fully reinsert the dipstick and withdraw itagain. Then note the highest level the oil hasreached on the dipstick. It should be betweenthe upper ("F") and lower ("L") range.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the performance andservice of the engine. It is suggested that youcheck the oil level at least once a week in normaluse and more often if you are on a trip or drivingin severe conditions.

G030B01O-AAT

Recommended Oil

The engine oil quality should meet the followingclassification.

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

G030B01JM-U

NOTE:o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20 (5W-

30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is preferredregardless of regional option and en-gine variation.

o If SAE 5W-20 (5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 en-gine oil is not available, secondary rec-ommended engine oil for correspond-ing temperature range can be used.

WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when adding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

Page 195: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6 CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER

!

If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark,add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil:

1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counter-clockwise.

2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do notoverfill.

3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.

The distance between the "F" and "L" marks isequal to about 1 quart of oil.

G040A03GK-AAT

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oilfiller cap.

3. Slide underneath the car and loosen thedrain plug by turning it counterclockwise witha wrench of the proper size. Be sure that adrain pan is in position to catch the oil as itdrains out, then remove the drain plug.

WARNING:Be very careful when draining the engine oilas it may be hot enough to burn you!

G030D01A-AAT

Adding Oil

HGK5005

2.0L 2.7L

The engine oil and filter should be changed atthose intervals specified in the maintenanceschedule in Section 5. If the car is being drivenin severe conditions, more frequent oil and filterchanges are required.

The procedure for changing the oil and filter isas follows:

1. Park the car on level ground and set theparking brake. Start the engine and let itwarm up until the needle on the coolanttemperature gauge moves above the lowestmark. Turn the engine off and place the gearselector lever in "P" (automatic) or reversegear (manual transaxle).

G040A03E

G040A01B

Oil filler cap

Oil filter

2.0L

2.7L

Oil filler cap

Oil filterDrain plug

Page 196: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

7CHECKING AND CHANGING THEENGINE COOLANT

!G050A01A-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. When the engine is hot, theengine coolant is under pressure and mayerupt through the opening if the cap isremoved. You could be seriously burned ifyou do not observe this precaution. Do notremove the radiator cap until the radiator iscool to the touch.

!

!4. When the oil has stopped draining, replace

the drain plug using a new gasket and re-tighten by turning it clockwise.

Tightening torque is:4.5 ~ 4.0 kgf.m (2.0L)4.5 ~ 3.5 kgf.m (2.7L)

5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counter-clockwise with a oil filter wrench of the propersize. A certain amount of oil will come outwhen you remove the filter. So be sure tohave your drain pan in place underneath it.

6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with theinstructions on the carton or on the filter itself.Do not over-tighten. (Tightening torque :1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m)Be sure that the mounting surface on theengine is clean and that the old gasket isremoved completely. Lubricate the newgasket on the filter with clean engine oilbefore installation.

7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.8. Refill the crankcase with the recommended

engine oil. Refer to the specification in chap-ter 9 for engine oil capacity.

CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil using bya funnel. Do not overfill! Engine damagemay occur if overfilled.

9. Start the engine and check to be sure no oilis leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.

10.Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.

NOTE:Always dispose of used engine oil in anenvironmentally acceptable manner. It issuggested that it be placed in a sealedcontainer and taken to a service station forreclamation. Do not pour the oil on theground or put it in with the householdtrash.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Used engine oil may cause irritation orcancer of the skin if left in contact with theskin for prolonged periods of time. Usedengine oil contains chemicals that havecaused cancer in laboratory animals. Al-ways protect your skin by washing yourhands thoroughly with soap and warmwater as soon as possible after handlingused oil.

Page 197: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

8

G050C01A-AAT

To Check the Coolant LevelG050D02A-AAT

To Change the Engine Coolant

The engine coolant should be changed at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.

CAUTION:Engine coolant can damage the finish ofyour car. If you spill engine coolant on thecar, wash it off thoroughly with clean water.

1. Park the car on level ground, set the park-ing brake and remove the radiator cap whencool.

2. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow allthe engine coolant to drain from the coolingsystem, then securely close the drain cock.

3. Check Section 9 for the capacity of thecooling system in your car. Then, followingthe manufacturer’s directions on the enginecoolant container, add the appropriate quan-tity of coolant to the radiator.

!

The coolant level can be seen on the side of theplastic coolant reservoir. The level of the cool-ant should be between the "L" and "F" lines onthe reservoir when the engine is cold. If the levelis below the "L" mark, add engine coolant tobring it up between "L" and "F". If the level is low,inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluidlevel frequently. If the level drops again, visityour Hyundai dealer for an inspection anddiagnosis of the reason.

HGK4006

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant shouldbe compatible with aluminum engine parts.Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives shouldnot be used. The cooling system must bemaintained with the correct concentration andtype of engine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion. Never allow the concentration ofantifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go belowthe 35% level, or damage to the cooling systemmay result. For proper concentration whenadding or replacing the engine coolant, refer tothe following table.

Ambient

temperature

°F ( °G)

5 (-15)

-13 (-25)

-31 (-35)

-49 (-45)

65%

60%

50%

40%

35%

40%

50%

60%

WaterAntifreeze

solution

Engine Coolant concentration

Page 198: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

9

! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the coolant fan so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

4. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise with-out pressing down on it, until it stops. Thisrelieves any pressure remaining in the cool-ing system. And remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turning counterclock-wise.Now fill the radiator with clean demineralizedor distilled water. Continue to add cleandemineralized or distilled water in small quan-tities until the fluid level stays up in theradiator neck.

G050D03E

5. Start the engine, top off the radiator withwater and then add coolant to the reservoiruntil the level is between "L" and "F".

6. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps andcheck to be sure the drain cocks are fullyclosed and not leaking.

G050D04E

Page 199: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

10

G060C02GK-AET

Changing the Spark Plugs

You will find it easier to change spark plugs if theengine is cold. Always change one spark plugat a time. This helps avoid getting the wiresmixed up.

HGK5066

G060B03GK-AAT

Replacing the Spark Plugs

The spark plugs should be changed at theintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5 or whenever engineperformance indicates they should be changed.Symptoms that suggest poor spark plug perfor-mance include engine misfiring under load, lossof fuel economy, poor acceleration, etc. Whenspark plugs are replaced, always use sparkplugs recommended by Hyundai. The use ofother spark plugs can result in loss of perfor-mance, radio interference or engine damage.

Recommended Spark Plugs:

SPARK PLUGS

G060A02GK-AAT

Your engine was originally equipped with plati-num-tipped or iridium-tipped spark plugs.Platinum-tipped or iridium-tipped spark plugswill last longer than conventional type sparkplugs. Platinum-tipped spark plug can be iden-tified by blue lines on the ceramic shell.

NOTE:Do not clean or regap platinum-tipped/iridium-tipped spark plugs.

HSM392

2.0L 2.7L

0.03

9 ~

0.0

43 in

. (1.

0~1.

1 m

m)

0.03

9 ~

0.0

43 in

. (1.

0~1.

1 m

m)

NOTE:o When replacing the spark plug, genuine

Hyundai replacement parts are recom-mended.

o It is recommended that the spark plugfor 2.7L Engine should be changed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

TYPE

RC10PYPB4(CHAMPION)*1

PFR5N-11 (NGK) *1

RC10PYPB4(CHAMPION)*1

PFR5N-11(NGK)*1

IFR5G-11(NGK)*2

2.0L

2.7L

REMARK

*1. Platinum coated.*2. Iridium coated.

Page 200: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

11

! WARNING:It is recommended that the engine be coolor cold when changing the spark plugs. Ifthe engine is hot, you could burn yourselfon the insulated connector, the spark plugor the engine itself.

4. When preparing to remove the old sparkplug, guide the socket down over the sparkplug, being careful not to damage the ce-ramic insulator.

5. To remove the old spark plug, turn thewrench handle in a counterclockwise direc-tion.

6. To install the new spark plug, guide thesocket down over the spark plug, beingcareful not to damage the ceramic insulator.

HGK5062

1. Remove the engine rocker cover.

NOTE:It is recommended that the spark plugs (For2.7L Engines) should be changed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

2. Using a clean cloth, remove any dirt that hasaccumulated around the base of the sparkplug so it cannot fall into the cylinder when thespark plug is removed.

3. To remove the spark plug cable, pull straightup on the insulated connector, not the cable.Pulling on the cable may damage the carboncore conductor.

NOTE:Spark plugs should be tightened firmly.Over-tightening can damage the threads inthe aluminum cylinder head. Also, leavingthem too loose can cause the spark plug toget very hot and possibly result in damageto the engine.

7. Replace the cable by pushing the insulatedconnector directly down onto the electrode.Check to be sure it has snapped into placeand can't fall off.

HGK5063

Page 201: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

12 CHANGING THE AIR CLEANERFILTER

G070A01E-AAT

To change the filter, unsnap the clips around thecover. When this is done, the cover can be liftedoff, the old filter removed and the new filter putin its place. Genuine Hyundai ReplacementParts are recommended.

CAUTION:o Operating your vehicle without a proper

air filter in place can result in excessiveengine wear.

o When removing the air cleaner filter, becareful that dust or dirt does not enterthe air intake. These may result in dam-age to the air cleaner filter.

HGK5010

!

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

G080A04A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefully inspectedfrom time to time and cleaned to remove accu-mulations of road film or other debris. To cleanthe wiper blades and arms, use a clean spongeor cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water.If the wipers continue to streak or smear theglass, replace them with Genuine HyundaiReplacement Parts or their equivalent.

G080A02GK

! CAUTION:o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.

This can result in more rapid wear of thewiper blades and may scratch the glass.

o Keep the blade rubber out of contactwith petroleum products such as engineoil, gasoline etc.

o When the wiper blade is freezed in winteror the washer fluid reservoir is empty, thewiper may not operate for ten minutes.This isn't a mechanical trouble but thefunction protecting the wiper by operat-ing circuit breaker inside of the wipermotor.

! WARNING:o Windshield washer fluid agents contain

some amounts of alcohol and can beflammable under certain circumstances.Do not allow sparks or flame to contactthe washer fluid or the washer fluidreservoir. Damage to the vehicle or itsoccupants could occur.

o Windshield washer fluid is poisonous tohumans and animals. Do not drink wind-shield washer fluid. Serious injury ordeath could occur.

Page 202: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

13

1. Put a new wiper blade onto the wiper arm andlower the wiper blade at the level of the wiperarm as shown in the drawing.

2. Pull up the wiper blade until you hear anaudible "click" to engage in the end of thewiper arm.

NOTE:Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against thewindshield.

2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and pull up it.

To install the wiper blade

HHR5049

HHR5050

G080B01HR-GAT

Replacing the Wiper Blades

To replace the wiper blades, raise the wiper tothe vertical.

To remove the wiper blade

1. Push down the wiper blade with the locking clip(1) pressed to detach it from the wiper arm.

HHR5048

(1)

HHR5051

Page 203: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

14

G100A03GK-AAT

Transaxle lubricant in the manual transaxleshould be checked at those intervals specifiedin the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section5.

Recommended OilUse only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF75W/85 (API GL-4) or equivalents in the manualtransaxle.

Manual Transaxle Oil CapacityThe oil capacity of the manual transaxle:5 speed: 2.27 U.S. quarts (2.15L)6 speed: 2.32 U.S. quarts (2.2L)

HGK5009

Filler plug

Drain plug

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE OIL(MANUAL)

CAUTION:o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)

should not be used in the washer systembecause it will damage the car’s finish.

o The washer should not be operated ifthe washer reservoir is empty. This candamage the washer fluid pump.

o In areas where water freezes in winter,use windshield washer antifreeze.

!

FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR

G090A02A-AAT

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to thewindshield washer system.A good quality washer fluid should be used to fillthe washer reservoir. The fluid level should bechecked more frequently during inclementweather or whenever the washer system is inmore frequent use.The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.2 U.S.quarts (3.0 Liters).

HGK5014

Page 204: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

15

! WARNING:It is always better to check the transaxle oillevel when the engine is cool or cold. If theengine is hot, you should exercise greatcaution to avoid burning yourself on hotengine or exhaust parts.

G100B02A-AAT

To Check the Manual TransaxleFluid Level

Park the car on level ground with the engine off.

1. Using a wrench of the correct size, loosenthe oil filler plug by turning it counterclock-wise and remove it with your fingers.

2. Use your finger or suitable tool to feel insidethe hole. The oil level should be at its bottomedge. If it is not, check for leaks beforeadding oil. To refill the transaxle or bring theoil level up,add oil slowly until it reaches theproper level. Do not overfill.

3. Replace the plug and washer, screw it in withyour fingers and then tighten securely withthe wrench.

G100B01L

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEFLUID (AUTOMATIC)

G110A01E-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle shouldbe checked at those intervals specified in thevehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid is basically redcolor. As driving distance increases, thefluid color turns darkish red gradually. It isa normal condition and you should notjudge the need to replace based upon thechanging color.You must replace the automatic transaxlefluid in accordance with intervals specifiedin the vehicle maintenance schedule insection 5.

Page 205: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

16

G110D02Y-AAT

To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level

Park the car on level ground with the parkingbrake engaged. When the transaxle fluid levelis checked, the transaxle fluid should be atnormal operating temperature and the engineidling.

While the engine is idling, apply the brakes andmove the gear selector lever from "P" to eachof its other positions — "R", "N", "D" — and thenreturn to "N" or "P". With the engine still idling:

1. Open the hood, being careful to keep hands,long hair and clothing clear of any movingparts.

HGK3025

G110B05A-AAT

Recommended Fluid

Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is speciallydesigned to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINEATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SPIII or other brands meeting the SP III specifica-tion approved by Hyundai Motor Co.. Damagecaused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered byyour new vehicle limited warranty.

CAUTION:Use of aftermarket ATF additives may causedamage to the automatic transaxle. Onlyuse HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIA-MOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or otherbrands meeting the SP III specification ap-proved by Hyundai Motor Co.. If you arehaving your vehicle serviced at a facilityother than a Hyundai dealer, verify ATF isused for your vehicle.

!

G110C02Y-AAT

Transaxle Fluid Capacity

The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is8.2 U.S. quarts (7.8 liters).

WARNING:The transaxle fluid level should be checkedwhen the engine is at normal operatingtemperature. This means that the engine,radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hot.Exercise great care not to burn yourselfduring this procedure.

!

Page 206: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

17

!

HGK5008

Fluid level should be within this range

2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe it clean,reinsert the dipstick as far as it will go, thenremove it again. Now check the fluid level onthe dipstick. It should be in the "HOT" rangeon the dipstick.

3. If the transaxle fluid level is low, use a funnelto add transaxle fluid through the dipsticktube until the level reaches the "HOT" range.Do not overfill.

HGK5007

2.0L 2.7L

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan, so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

CHECKING THE BRAKES

G120A01A-AAT

CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to the safeoperation of the car, it is suggested thatthey be checked and inspected by yourHyundai dealer. The brakes should bechecked and inspected for wear at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle mainte-nance schedule in Section 5.

!

Page 207: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

18

!

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if it gets into youreyes. It will also damage your vehicle’spaint if spilled on it and not removed imme-diately.

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

G120C02A-AAT

Recommended Brake Fluid

Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your brakingsystem. Follow the instructions printed on thecontainer.

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir shouldbe checked periodically. The level should bebetween the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at or below the"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it up to"MAX". Do not overfill.

HGK5012 To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt thenunscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour therecommended fluid into the reservoir. Do notoverfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reser-voir and tighten.

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

! WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damageyour vision if it gets into your eyes. Use onlyDOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from asealed container. Do not allow the fluid canor reservoir to remain open any longer thanrequired. This will prevent entry of dirt andmoisture which can damage the brake sys-tem and cause improper operation.

Page 208: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

19

!

G130B02A-AAT

To Replace the Fluid

Recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT 4 specification should be used. Thereservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoidcontamination from foreign matter or moisture.

NOTE:Do not allow any other liquids to contami-nate the brake fluid. Seal damage will result.

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if you get it in youreyes. It will also damage your vehicle’spaint if spilled on it and not removed imme-diately.

AIR CONDITIONING CARE

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (and engineradiator) should be checked periodically foraccumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc.These can interfere with maximum cooling ef-ficiency. When removing such accumulations,brush or hose them away carefully to avoidbending the cooling fins.

CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID

G130A01S-AAT

To Check the Clutch Fluid

The clutch fluid level in the master cylindershould be checked when performing other un-der hood services. The system should bechecked for leakage at the same time.Check to make certain that the clutch fluid levelis always between the "MAX" and "MIN" levelmarkings on the fluid reservoir. Fill as required.Fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch systemwhich should be inspected and repaired imme-diately. Consult your Hyundai dealer.

HGK5013

Page 209: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

20

!

G140C01A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and the seals in thesystem, the air conditioning should be run for atleast 10 minutes each week. This is particularlyimportant during cool weather when the airconditioning system is not otherwise in use.

G140B01A-AAT

Checking the Air Conditioning Opera-tion

1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle forseveral minutes with the air conditioning setat the maximum cold setting.

2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents isnot cold, have the air conditioning systeminspected by your Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION:Running the air conditioning system forextended periods of time with a low refrig-erant level may damage the compressor.

G140D01A-AAT

Checking the Compressor Drive BeltWhen the air conditioning is being used regu-larly, the compressor drive belt tension shouldbe checked at least once a month with theengine turned off.To check the drive belt tension, press down onthe belt halfway between the engine crankshaftand compressor pulleys. Pressing with yourfinger, you should not be able to deflect this beltanymore than 1/3 of an inch. If you have theinstruments to check it, with a force of 22lb.(98N), the deflection should be 0.315 inches(approx 8.0 mm). If the belt is too loose, have itadjusted by your Hyundai dealer.

Crankshaft pulley HTB219

A/C

Tension pulley

0.315 in.(8mm)

2.0L

G190A02B

A/Ccomp.

Crankshaft pulley

Power steeringAuto tensioner

Generator

2.7 L

Page 210: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

21

2. Open the glove box and remove the mount-ing screws on the upside of the glove box.

3. Remove the filter cover.HGK2112 HGK2114

CHANGING THE AIR CONDITIONERFILTER

G145A02GK-GAT

(In front of blower unit) (If installed)

The air conditioner filter is located in front of theevaporator unit behind the glove box.It helps to decrease the amount of pollutantsentering the car.

1. Remove the mounting screws on the down-side of the glove box.

HGK2111

Page 211: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

22

4. Replace the air conditioner filter with a newone.

5. Installation is the reverse order of disassem-bly.

HGK2115

CAUTION:Be sure to install the air conditioner filter inthe direction of the arrow sign. Otherwise,it may cause noise or deterioration.

!

CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY

G150A01A-AAT

Steering Wheel

To check the steering wheel free-play, stop thecar with the wheels pointed straight ahead andgently move the steering wheel back and forth.Use very light finger pressure and be sensitiveto changes in resistance that mark the limits ofthe free-play. If the free-play is greater thanspecified, have it inspected by your Hyundaidealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

HGK5019

1.18 in.(30 mm)

G160A01A-AAT

Clutch Pedal

With the engine off, press lightly on the clutchpedal until you feel a change in resistance. Thisis the clutch pedal free-play. The free-playshould be within the limits specified in the illus-tration. If it is not, have it inspected by yourHyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired ifnecessary.

G160A01E

0.24 ~ 0.51 in.(6~13 mm)

Page 212: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

23CHECKING BRAKE PEDALCLEARANCE

CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

G190A01A-AATG180A01A-AAT

You need a helper to check the brake pedalclearance. With the engine running, have yourhelper press down on the brake pedal severaltimes and then hold it down with a force of about110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N). The brake pedal clear-ance is the distance from the top surface of thebrake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under thefloor mat.If the brake pedal clearance is not within thelimits specified in the illustration, have it in-spected by your Hyundai dealer and adjustedor repaired if necessary.

G180A01L

1.78 in. (45.1 mm)

G170A01A-AAT

Brake Pedal

With the engine off, press down on the brakepedal several times to reduce the vacuum in thebrake booster.Then, using your hand, press down slowly onthe brake pedal until you feel a change inresistance. This is the brake pedal free-play.The free-play should be within the limits speci-fied in the illustration. If it is not, have it inspectedby your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or re-paired if necessary.

HXGS508

0.12~0.31 in.(3~8 mm)

Tensionpulley

Generator

G190A01GK

Powersteering

Water pumppulley

A/Ccomp.

2.0L

G190A02B

A/Ccomp.

Crankshaft pulley

Power steeringAuto tensioner

Generator

2.7L

Crankshaft pulley

Page 213: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

24

Drive belts should be checked periodically forproper tension and adjusted if necessary. At thesame time, belts should be examined for cracks,wear, fraying or other evidence of deteriorationand replaced if necessary.Belt routing should also be checked to be surethere is no interference between the belts andother parts of the engine. After a belt is replaced,the new belt should be adjusted again after twoor three weeks to eliminate slack resulting frominitial stretching after use.

CHECKING AND REPLACINGFUSES

G200A01GK-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits fromthe battery are ever overloaded, thus prevent-ing damage to the entire wiring harness. (Thiscould be caused by a short in the systemdrawing too much current.) If this ever happens,have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause,repair the system and replace the fusible link.The fusible links are located in a relay box(2.0L)or below the positive (+) post cover of thebattery (2.7L) for easy inspection.

G200A01E

GoodBad

! CAUTION:When replacing a fusible link, never useanything but a new fusible link with thesame or lower amperage rating. Never usea piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link.This could result in serious damage andcreate a fire hazard.

Page 214: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

25

! CAUTION:A burned-out fuse indicates that there is aproblem in the electrical circuit. If you re-place a fuse and it blows as soon as theaccessory is turned on, the problem isserious and should be referred to a Hyundaidealer for diagnosis and repair. Never re-place a fuse with anything except a fusewith the same or a lower amperage rating.A higher capacity fuse could cause damageand create a fire hazard.

G200B02L

Good Burned out

1. Turn off the ignition and all other switches.2. Open the fuse box and examine each fuse.

Remove each fuse by pulling it toward you(a small "fuse puller" tool is contained in thefuse box to simplify this operation).

3. Be sure to check all other fuses even if youfind one that appears to have burned out.

HXDFL1026-1

4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a newfuse of the same rating into place. The fuseshould be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuseclip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer.If you do not have a spare fuse, you may beable to borrow a fuse of the same or lowerrating from an accessory you can tempo-rarily get along without (the radio or cigarettelighter, for example). Always remember toreplace the borrowed fuse.

NOTE:See page 6-39 for the fuse panel descrip-tions.

G200B02A-AAT

Replacing Accessory Fuse

The fuse box for the lights and other electricalaccessories will be found low on the dashboardon the driver’s side. Inside the box you will finda list showing the circuits protected by eachfuse.If any of your car’s lights or other electricalaccessories stop working, a blown fuse couldbe the reason. If the fuse has burned out, youwill see that the metal strip inside the fuse hasburned through. If you suspect a blown fuse,follow this procedure:

HGK4003

Page 215: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

26 CHECKING THE BATTERY

!

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! When workingwith batteries, carefully observe the follow-ing precautions to avoid serious injuries.

The fluid in the battery contains a strong solutionof sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and highlycorrosive. Be careful not to spill it on yourself orthe car. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself,immediately do the following:

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assistance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out youreyes with water and get medical assistanceas soon as possible. While you are beingdriven to get medical assistance, continue torinse your eyes by using a sponge or softcloth saturated with water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a largequantity of water or milk followed by milk ofmagnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetableoil. Get medical assistance as soon aspossible.

While batteries are being charged (either by abattery charger or by the vehicle’s generator),they produce explosive gases. Always ob-serve these warnings to prevent injuries fromoccurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well ventilatedarea.

o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking inthe area.

o Keep children away from the area.

!

G210B03A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corro-sion around the battery posts or terminalsshould be removed using a solution of house-hold baking soda and warm water. After thebattery terminals are dry, cover them with a lightcoating of grease.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the state of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Batteries also contain other chemicalsknown to the state of California to causecancer. Wash hands after handling.

D010B01GK

Page 216: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

27

!!

CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLINGFANS

!G220A01A-AAT

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the coolant fan, so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

WARNING:Always read the following in-structions carefully when han-dling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and allother flames or sparks away fromthe battery.

Hydrogen, which is a highly com-bustible gas, is always present inbattery cells and may explode ifignited.

Keep batteries out of the reach ofchildren because batteries con-tain highly corrosive SULFURICACID. Do not allow battery acidto contact your skin, eyes, cloth-ing or paint finish.

If any electrolyte gets into youreyes, flush your eyes with cleanwater for at least 15 minutes andget immediate medical attention.If possible, continue to applywater with a sponge or cloth untilmedical attention is received.

If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contactedarea.If you feel a pain or a burningsensation, get medical attentionimmediately.

Wear eye protection when charg-ing or working near a battery.Always provide ventilation whenworking in an enclosed space.

o When lifting a plastic-cased battery, ex-cessive pressure on the case may causebattery acid to leak, resulting in personalinjury. Lift with a battery carrier or withyour hands on opposite corners.

o Never attempt to charge the battery whenthe battery cables are connected.

o The electrical ignition system works withhigh voltage.Never touch these components with theengine running or the ignition switchedon.

WARNING:

Page 217: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

28 POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL

G230A03A-AAT

The power steering fluid level should be checkedregularly. To check the power steering fluidlevel, be sure the engine is "OFF", then checkto make certain that the power steering fluidlevel is between the "MAX" and "MIN" levelmarkings on the fluid reservoir.

NOTE:Grinding noise from the power steeringpump may be heard immediately after theengine is started in extremely cold condi-tions (below - 4°F). If the noise stops duringwarm up, there is no abnormal function inthe system. It is due to a power steeringfluid characteristic in extremely cold condi-tions.

HGK5011

G220C01A-AAT

Checking Condenser Cooling Fan

The condenser coolant fan should come onautomatically whenever the air conditioning is inoperation.

G220B01A-AAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should come on auto-matically if the engine coolant temperature ishigh.

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check the power steer-ing hose connections for fluid leakage at regularintervals. The power steering hoses should bereplaced if there is severe surface cracking,scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of the hosecould cause premature failure.

Recommended FluidUse PSF-3 type fluid

NOTE:Do not start the engine when the powersteering oil reservoir is empty.

Page 218: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

29

G290B01GK-AAT

Adjustment After Headlight AssemblyReplacement

If the vehicle has had front body repair and theheadlight assembly has been replaced, theheadlight aiming should be checked using anaiming screen as shown in the illustration. Turnon the headlight switch.1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light is

parallel to center line of the body and isaligned with point "P" shown in the illustration.

2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the centerof headlights.

G290B01GK

L

W

H

H

Cut-off line

Ground line

"P"Horizontal line

Vertical line0.827 in. (21 mm)

HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT

G290A03GK

G290A02GK-AAT

!

1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press

the front bumper & rear bumper down sev-eral times. Place vehicle at a distance of 118in. (3m) from the test wall.

3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except forfull levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, andspare tire, jack, and tools).

4. Clean the head light lenses and turn on theheadlights.

5. Open the hood.6. Draw the vertical line (through the center of

each headlight beam pattern) and the hori-zontal line (through the center of each head-light beam pattern) on the aiming screen.And then, draw the parallel line at 0.827 in. (21mm) under the horizontal line.

7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to theparallel line with a phillips screwdriver -VERTICAL AIMING.

WARNING:Horizontal aiming should be adjusted by anauthorized Hyundai Dealer.

Low Beam Vertical aiming

Before performing aiming adjustment, makesure of the following.

G290A04GK

High BeamVertical aiming

Page 219: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

30

SPECIFICATION:"H"Horizontal center line of headlights from ground:Low Beam: 26.7 in. (679mm)High Beam: 26.5 in. (672mm)

"W"Distance between each headlight center :Low Beam: 47.3 in. (1,202mm)High Beam: 38.0 in. (966mm)

"L"Distance between the headlights and the wallthat the lights are tested against : 118 in. (3,000mm)

REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS

!

G260A02A-AAT

Before attempting to replace a light bulb, be surethe switch is turned to the "OFF" position.The next paragraph shows how to reach thelight bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure toreplace the burned-out bulb with one of thesame number and wattage rating.

See page 6-38 for the wattage description.

CAUTION:Keep the lamps out of contact with petro-leum products, such as oil, gasoline, etc.

G270A01GK-AAT

Headlight and Front Turn Signal Light

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection.2. Open the engine hood.3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base,

avoid touching the glass.

4. Disconnect the power cord from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.

HGK5023

Page 220: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

31

8. Remove the protective cap from the re-placement bulb and install the new bulb bymatching the plastic base with the headlighthole. Reattach the bulb spring and recon-nect the connector.

9. Use the protective cap and carton to prompt-ly dispose of the old bulb.

10.Check for proper headlight aim.

HGK5027HGK5024

5. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwiseand remove it.

6. Disconnect the connector from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.

HGK5026

7. Push the bulb spring to remove the headlightbulb.

Page 221: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

32

! WARNING:This halogen bulb contains gas under pres-sure and if impacted could shatter, result-ing in flying fragments. Always wear eyeprotection when servicing the bulb. Protectthe bulb against abrasions or scratchesand against liquids when lighted. Turn thebulb on only when installing in a headlight.Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked.Keep the bulb out of the reach of childrenand dispose of the used bulb with care.

HGK5036 G270A03O

11.To replace the front turn signal light bulb,remove from the bulb holder and install thenew bulb.

G270B01GK-GAT

Rear Combination Light(Without woofer speaker)

1. Open the tail gate.

HGK5037

(1)

(2)(3)

(4)

Page 222: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

33

5. To replace the rear combination light (stop/tail light, back-up light, turn signal light, sidemark light), take it out from the bulb holder byturning it counterclockwise.

(1) Stop/Tail light(2) Back-up light(3) Turn signal light(4) Side mark light

6. Install the new bulb.

HGK5044

(1)

(2)(3)

(4)

HGK5041

2. To remove the cover of the rear luggage trim,turn the knob by hand to the counterclock-wise.

HGK5042

3. Remove the nut (8mm) with a spanner.

4. To detach the rear combination light hit itstrongly by hand.

HGK5043-1

Page 223: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

34

2. Take off the luggage board.

HGK5038

G275B01GK-GAT

Rear Combination Light(With woofer speaker)

HGK5037

(1)

(2)(3)

(4)

1. Open the tail gate.

HGK5039

HGK5040

3. Extract the mounting screws (10mm) aroundthe woofer speaker with a spaner.

4. Disconnect the power cord from the wooferspeaker.

Page 224: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

35

HGK5044

(1)

(2)(3)

(4)

8. To replace the rear combination light (stop/tail light, back-up light, turn signal light, sidemark light), take it out from the bulb holder byturning it counterclockwise.

(1) Stop/Tail light(2) Back-up light(3) Turn signal light(4) Side mark light

9. Install the new bulb.

HGK5041

5. To remove the cover of the rear luggae trim,turn the knob by hand to the counterclock-wise.

HGK5042

6. Remove the nut (8mm) with a wrench.

HGK5043-1

7. To detach the rear combination light hit itstrongly by hand.

Page 225: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

36

3. Disconnect the power cord.

HGK5046

HTB284

G270C01GK-AAT

Luggage Compartment Light

1. Open the tail gate.2. Remove the cover with a flat-blade screw-

driver.

HGK5045

4. Replace with a new bulb.

G270G01GK-AAT

Map Light

HGK5047

1. Remove the cover with a flat-blade screw-driver.

Page 226: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

37

HGK2112

2. Open the glove box and remove the mount-ing screws on the upside of the glove box.

HGK5048

G270H01GK-GAT

Glove Box Illuminated Light

1. Remove the mounting screws on the down-side of the glove box.

HGK21112. Replace with a new bulb.

Page 227: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

38

HGK5053

Clip

Power Cord

4. Disconnect the power cord.5. Remove the glove box illuminated light by

pushing the clip.

3. Remove the glove box by pulling strongly.

CAUTION:Be careful not to damage the glove boxwhen pulling the glove box.

!

HGK5052 HTB284

6. Replace with a new bulb.

Page 228: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

39

Part Name

High Mounted Rear

Stop Light

Rear

Combination

Light

License Plate Light

BULB WATTAGE

G280A04GK-AAT

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Part Name

Head Light (High/Low)

Map Light

Front Position Light

Front Fog Light (If installed)

Front Turn Signal Light/ Front Side Marker Light

Front Door Edge Warning Light

Luggage Compartment Light

Wattage

55/55

10

5

51

28/8

5

5

No.

8

9

10

11

12

13

Wattage

2.4 (LED)

3.5 (LED)

5

27

27/8

27

5

HGK5021A

(High) (Low)

Socket type

Px26d/Px26d

W2.1 X 9.5D

W2.1 X 9.5d

P22d

BA15d

W2.1 X 9.5d

S8.5 / 8.5

With spoiler

Without spoiler

Rear Side Marker Light

Turn Signal Light

Stop/Tail Light

Back-up Light

Socket type

W2.1 X 9.5d

-

BA15s

BA15d

BA15s

W2.1 X 9.5d

S8.5 / 8.5

Page 229: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

40 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200C01GK-GAT

Engine Compartment

If installedNOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect thefuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

HGK4005

Page 230: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

41

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

Generator(2.0L)

BCM BOX(Tail lamp relay,Power connector,Fuse(2,7,12,13,19,20,24)

Condenser fan relay

Radiator fan relay

Engine control relay, Fuel pump relay, A/T control relay,

Generator,ECM(Z2.7L),PCM(2.0L)

Ignition switch,Start relay

ABS/ESP control module,ESP Air bleeding connector

ABS/ESP control module,ESP Air bleeding connector

Blower relay

Injector

Oxygen sensor,Camshaft position sensor, Idle speed control actuator

DRL control module

Front fog lamp relay

TCM(2.7L),ECM(2.7L)

Horn relay,A/C relay

Head lamp relay(High)

Head lamp relay(Low)

FUSERATING

120A

50A

30A

30A

30A

30A

40A

40A

30A

15A

10A

15A

15A

10A

15A

15A

15A

DESCRIPTION

BATT

BATT

COND

RAD

ECU

IGN

ABS 1

ABS 2

BLOWER

INJ

SNSR

DRL

F/FOG

ECU

HORN,A/CON

H/LP (HI)

H/LP (LO)

Page 231: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

42

G200D02GK-GAT

Inner Panel

HGK204-E

Page 232: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

43

DESCRIPTIONIG COIL

AMPB/UP LAMPA/BAG IND

A/BAGHTD MIRHAZARDR/WIPERTAIL-RHF/WIPERA/C SW

RR DEFOGSTOP

TAIL-LHA/CONECU

CLUSTERROOM LP

P/WINDOWT/GATE

IGNRR FOGC/LIGHTS/ROOFS/HTRABS

AUDIO

PROTECTED COMPONENTSIgnition coil(2.7L), Electronic chrome mirrorAMPBack-up lamp switch,Transaxle range switch,Cruise control module,Stop lamp switchInstrument cluster (A/BAG IND.)SRS control moduleMirror defoggerHazard relayRear wiper motor,Rear intermittent wiper relayRight tail lamps,Glove box lampFront wiper motor,Front wiper relayBlower relay,Blower motorDefogger relayStop lamp switch,Burglar alarm horn relay,Folding/Unfolding relyLeft tail lampsA/C control module, Blower relayECM, Multi gauge unit, TCM, Vehicle speed sensorInstrument cluster (Power), Per-excitation resister, DRL Control module,GeneratorRoom lamp,Clock,Audio,Data link connector,Multi gauge unitPower window relayTrunk lid switchAQS sensor,Head lamp relay,DRL Control moduleRear fog lampCigarette lighter,Outside mirror switchSunroof,Power door lock/Unlock relaySeat warmerESP/ABS control moduleAudio,Digital clock

FUSERATING20A20A10A10A15A10A10A15A10A20A10A30A15A10A10A10A10A10A30A15A10A10A15A15A20A10A10A

Page 233: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

7Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

7

Page 234: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission Control System

The Exhaust Emission Control System is ahighly effective system which controls exhaustemissions while maintaining good vehicle per-formance.

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission ControlSystem

The Positive Crankcase Ventilation System isemployed to prevent air pollution caused byblow-by gases being emitted from the crank-case. This system supplies fresh filtered air tothe crankcase through the air intake hose.Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes withblow-by gases, which then pass through thePCV valve and into the induction system.

H010A02GK-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emissioncontrol system to meet all requirements of theU.S. Environmental Protection Agency or Cali-fornia Air Resources Board.There are three emission control systems whichare as follows.

1) Crankcase Emission Control System2) Evaporative Emission Control System3) Exhaust Emission Control System

In order to ensure the proper function of theemission control systems, it is recommendedthat you have your car inspected and main-tained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in ac-cordance with the maintenance schedule in thismanual.

Caution for the Inspection and MaintenanceTest (Vehicle with Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

o To prevent the vehicle from misfiringduring dynamometer testing, discon-nect the ABS connector located insideof the wheel guard (driver side).

o For more information, see shop manual(BR Group, Wheel Speed Sensor).

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank areabsorbed and stored in the onboard canister.When the engine is running, the fuel vaporsabsorbed in the canister are drawn into theinduction system through the purge controlsolenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlledby the Engine Control Module (ECM); when theengine coolant temperature is low during idling,the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is nottaken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens tointroduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (Includ-ing ORVR: Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery) System

The Evaporative Emission Control System isdesigned to prevent fuel vapors from escapinginto the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allow thevapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into acanister while refueling at the gas station, pre-venting the escape of fuel vapors into theatmosphere.)

Page 235: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

3CATALYTIC CONVERTER

H020A01A-AAT

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with a mono-lith type three-way catalytic converter to re-duce the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons andnitrogen oxides contained in the exhaust gas.Exhaust gases passing through the catalyticconverter may cause it to operate at a very hightemperature. The introduction of large amountsof unburned gasoline into the exhaust maycause the catalytic converter to overheat andcreate a fire hazard. This risk may be reducedby observing the following:

HGK5061

Catalytic Converter(California)

Catalytic Converter(Federal, California)

! WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good operating

condition. Extremely high catalytic con-verter temperatures can result from im-proper operation of the electrical, igni-tion or multiport electronic fuel injec-tion.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or ishard to start, have your Hyundai dealerinspect and repair the problem as soonas possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.Running out of gasoline may cause theengine to misfire and result in damage tothe catalytic converter.

o Avoid idling the engine for periodslonger than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not be pushed orpulled to get started. This may cause thecatalytic converter to overheat and cre-ate a fire hazard.

o Do not touch the catalytic converter orany other part of the exhaust systemwhile the catalytic converter is hot. Shutoff the engine, wait for at least one hourbefore touching the catalytic converteror any other part of the exhaust system.

o Remember that your Hyundai dealer isyour best source of assistance.

o Do not stop your Hyundai over any com-bustible material such as grass, paper,leaves or rags. These materials mightcontact the hot catalytic converter and afire might result.

Page 236: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2Recommended Inflation Pressures ............................... 8-3Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-4Tire Terminology and Definitions ................................... 8-6Snow Tires .................................................................... 8-8Tire Chains.................................................................... 8-9Tire Rotation.................................................................. 8-9Tire Balancing ............................................................. 8-10Tire Traction ................................................................ 8-10When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-10Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-11Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-11Consumer Information ................................................. 8-11Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-13Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ....................... 8-15

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTINGSAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING

ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

88

Page 237: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

2 ENGINE NUMBERVEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

I010B01A-AATI010A01A-AAT

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is thenumber used in registering your car and in alllegal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. Itcan be found in three different places on yourcar:

1. On the bulkhead between the engine andpassenger compartments.

2. On the left top side of the instrument panelwhere it can be seen by looking down throughthe windshield.

3. On the lower side of the center pillar outerpanel.

The engine number is stamped on the engineblock as shown in the drawing.

HGK220A

TIRES

I020A02A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your new Hyundaiare chosen to provide the best perfor-mance for normal driving.If you ever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtain ser-vice, see the tire manufacture's bookletincluded with your vehicle's Owner'sManual Literature Kit.

I010B01B

2.7L

HFO6003

2.0L

Page 238: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

3

I030A01JM-AAT

RECOMMENDED INFLATION PRES-SURES

Tire label located on the driver's side ofthe center pillar outer panel gives thecold tire pressures recommended foryour vehicle with the original tire size,the number of people that can be in yourvehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

These pressures were chosen to pro-vide the most satisfactory combinationof ride comfort, tire wear and stabilityunder normal conditions. Tire pressuresshould be checked at least monthly.Proper tire inflation pressures shouldbe maintained for these reasons:

I030B01GK

HGK6003

!

CAUTION:Always observe the following:

o Check pressures when the tiresare cold. (After the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least three hoursor hasn't been driven more than 1mile (1.6 km) since starting up.)

!

WARNING:o Lower-than-recommended tire

pressures cause uneven treadwear, poor handling, poor fueleconomy or tire failure.

o Higher-than-recommended tirepressures can cause poor han-dling, uneven tread wear or tirefailure.

Page 239: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

4

Check the tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. - "Cold" means yourvehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1mile (1.6 km).Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gage firmlyonto the valve to get a pressure mea-surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-sure matches the recommended pres-sure on the tire and loading informationlabel, no further adjustment is neces-sary. If the pressure is low, add air untilyou reach the recommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve. Recheck the tire pres-sure with the tire gage. Be sure to putthe valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

I035A01JM-AAT

CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-SURE

Check your tires once a month or more.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to Check

Use a good quality gage to check tirepressure. You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by lookingat them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they're underinflated.

Federal law requires tire manufacturersto place standardized information onthe sidewall of all tires. This informationidentifies and describes the fundamen-tal characteristics of the tire and alsoprovides the tire identification number(TIN) for safety standard certification.The TIN can be used to identify the tirein case of a recall.

I030B01GK-GAT

TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING

I030B04JM

1

23

4

5, 6

7

1

o Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.

o Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badly worn,or if your tires have been dam-aged, replace them.

Page 240: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

5

1. Manufacturer or Brand nameo Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.2. Tire size

(example: P215/45R17 87V)o The "P" indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles.A "T" is the designation for a tem-porary spare tire.

o Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimetersof the tire from sidewall edge tosidewall edge.

o Two-digit number (45): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height towidth.

o R: The "R" stands for radial.o Two-digit number (17): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

o Two digit number (87): This num-ber is the tire's load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support.

o V: Speed Rating. The speed ratingdenotes the speed at which a tire isdesigned to be driven for extendedperiods of time. The ratings rangefrom "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH).

3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) fornew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-

ment of Transportation". The sym-bol can be placed above, below orto the left or right of the Tire Identification Number. Indicates tire isin compliance with the U.S. De-partment of Transportation MotorVehicle Safety Standards.

o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer'sidentification mark

o 2nd two-digit code: Tire sizeo 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-

facture

o Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 3105 meansthe 31st week of 2005.

4. Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester, andothers. The letter "R" means radialply construction; the letter "D" meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter "B" means belted-biasply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflation pres-sure.

Page 241: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

6

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required tograde tires based on three perfor-mance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform Tire Qual-ity Grading on page 8-12.

I030D01JM-AAT

TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-TIONS

Air Pressure: The amount of air insidethe tire pressing outward on the tire. Airpressure is expressed in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional accesso-ries. Some examples of optional ac-cessories are, automatic transmission,power seats, and air conditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords thatis located between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made from steel orother reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords that holdthe tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe plies are laid at alternate anglesless than 90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of airpressure in a tire, measured in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascals(kPa) before a tire has built up heat fromdriving.Curb Weight: This means the weight ofa motor vehicle with standard and op-tional equipment including the maxi-mum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.DOT Markings: A code molded into thesidewall of a tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation motor vehiclesafety standards. The DOT code in-cludes the Tire Identification Number(TIN), an alphanumeric designator whichcan also identify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand and date ofproduction.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the rear axle.

Page 242: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

7

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The sideof an asymmetrical tire, that must al-ways face outward when mounted on avehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned number rang-ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds tothe load carrying capacity of a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which a coldtire may be inflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto the sidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-ing for a tire at the maximum permis-sible inflation pressure for that tire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: The num-ber of occupants a vehicle is designedto seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The side ofa asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that faces outward when mountedon a vehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letter-ing or bears manufacturer, brand and ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire usedon passenger cars and some light dutytrucks and multipurpose vehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure and shown on thetire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire and uponwhich the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire betweenthe tread and the bead.Speed Rating: An alphanumeric codeassigned to a tire indicating the maxi-mum speed at which a tire can operate.Traction: The friction between the tireand the road surface. The amount ofgrip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire that comesinto contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,sometimes called "wear bars," that showacross the tread of a tire when only 2/32inch of tread remains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards, a tire information systemthat provides consumers with ratingsfor a tire's traction, temperature andtreadwear. Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire.

Page 243: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

8

I040A01S-AAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size and havethe same load capacity as the originaltires. Snow tires should be installed onall four wheels; otherwise, poor han-dling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)more air pressure than the pressurerecommended for the standard tires onthe tire label on the driver side centerpillar outer panel or up to the maximumpressure shown on the tire sidewallwhichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The numberof designated seating positions multi-plied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the ratedcargo and luggage loadVehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire due to curband accessory weight plus maximumoccupant and cargo weight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessoryweight, and normal occupant weightand driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanentlyattached to a vehicle showing the origi-nal equipment tire size and recom-mended inflation pressure

I040B01JM-AAT

ALL SEASON TIRES

Hyundai specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good perfor-mance for use all year round, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All sea-son tires are identified by ALL SEASONand/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tiresidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than all season tires an may bemore appropriate in some areas.

I040C01JM-AAT

SUMMER TIRES

Hyundai specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performanceis substantrally reduced in snow and ice.Summer tires do not have the tire trac-tion rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on thetire side wall. if you plan to operate yourvehicle in snowy or icy conditions.Hyundai recommends the use of snowtires or all season tires on all four wheels.

Page 244: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

9

I060A02GK-AAT

TIRE ROTATION

Tires should be rotated every 6,000miles (10,000 km). If you notice thattires are wearing unevenly between ro-tations, have the car checked by aHyundai dealer so the cause may becorrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pressuresand be sure to check wheel nut torque.

HGK5016

!I050A02GK-AAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels. Be surethat the chains are installed in accor-dance with the manufacturer's instruc-tions. Refer to the following informa-tion.

WARNING:o When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, drive at less than20 mph (30 km/h).

o Use tire chains less than 0.39 in.(10mm) for "16, and "17 tires.

o Avoid sudden stop and turn tires.o Tighten firmly to avoid contact

with the vertical body, if you havenoise caused by chaws contact-ing the body, remove the chainsfor damage protection.

Tire size

205/55 R 16

215/45 R 17

Snow Chain

Thickness

Max. 0.39 in. (10 mm)

Max. 0.39 in. (10 mm)

16" Tire 17" Tire

To minimize tire and chain wear, do notcontinue to use tire chains when theyare no longer needed.

Page 245: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

10

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affecthandling and tire wear. The tires on yourHyundai were balanced before the carwas delivered but may need balancingagain during the years you own the car.Whenever a tire is dismounted for re-pair, it should be rebalanced beforebeing reinstalled on the car.

! WARNING:Do not mix bias-ply and radial-plytires under any circumstances. Thismay cause dangerous handling char-acteristics.

!WARNING:

When rotating the 215/45 R17 tires,the tires must be mount followingthe "ROTATION" direction markedon the sidewall of the tires.If rotating the tires from the left sideto the right side and from the rightside to the left side, separate thewheel from the tire and then remountthem.

Sidewall

HGK5018

Tire rotationdirection

Page 246: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

11

I080A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if you driveon worn tires, tires that are improperlyinflated or on slippery road surfaces.Tires should be replaced when treadwear indicators appear. To reduce thepossibility of losing control, slow downwhenever there is rain, snow or ice onthe road.

!I090A03A-AAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

HGK5015

TWI indicator

0.06 in. (1.6 mm) WARNING:o Driving on worn-out tires is dan-

gerous! Worn-out tires can causeloss of braking effectiveness,steering control and traction. Whenreplacing tires, never mix radialand bias ply tires on the same car.If you replace radial tires with bias-ply tires, they must be installed insets of four.

o Using tires and wheels of otherthan the recommended sizes couldcause unusual handling charac-teristics that could cause death,serious injury, or property dam-age.

o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai'sdimensional specifications mayfit poorly and result in damage tothe vehicle, including brokenwheel studs.

The original tires on your car have treadwear indicators. The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the "TWI"or " " marks, etc., The tread wearindicators appear when the tread depthis 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tire should bereplaced when these appear as a solidbar across two or more grooves of thetread. Always replace your tires withthose of the recommended size. If youchange wheels, the new wheel's rimwidth and offset must meet Hyundaispecification.

Page 247: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

12 CONSUMER INFORMATIONSPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

I110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUAL

A Hyundai Shop Manual is available from yourauthorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for pro-fessional technicians, but is simple enough formost mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

I100A02Y-AAT

Your Hyundai is delivered with the fol-lowing:

Spare tire and wheelWheel nut wrench, Wrench barJack

HGK4008

I120A02A-AAT

o New vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles LimitedWarranty.

o New vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Lim-ited Powertrain Warranty (original owneronly).

o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System War-

ranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty Federal

vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Lim-

ited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is providedin your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

I130A01A-AAT

This consumer information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issued by theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administrationof the U.S. Department of Transportation. Itprovides the purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Hyundai automobiles with infor-mation on uniform tire quality grading. YourHyundai dealer will help answer any questionsyou may have as you read this information.

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAIVEHICLE

Page 248: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

13

!

I130B04A-AAT

Uniform tire quality grading

Department of Transportation qualitygrades - All passenger vehicle tiresmust conform to Federal Safety Stan-dards in addition to these grades. Thesequality grades are molded on thesidewall.

Treadwear - The tread wear grade is acomparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and ahalf (1 - 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due to varia-tions in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road character-istics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C - The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction per-formance.

WARNING:The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hy-droplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.

Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B, andC, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a speci-fied indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive tempera-ture can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required bylaw.

Page 249: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

14

I130D03A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manu-factured to meet or exceed all applicable safetystandards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge youto read and follow all directions in this Owner'sManual, particularly the information under theheadings "NOTE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-ING".

If, after reading this manual, you have anyquestions regarding the operation of your ve-hicle, please contact your nearest HyundaiMotor America Regional Office as listed below:

Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware, Maine,Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hampshire,New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvanina, RhodeIsland, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia.

Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Alabama, Arkansas, Florida,Georgia, Louisiana, Mississippi, North Caro-lina, South Carolina, Oklahoma, Tennessee,Texas.

270 Riverside Parkway, Suite AAustell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, Missouri, lowa,Kansas, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Ne-braska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,Wisconsin.

Central Region170S Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, Cali-fornia, Colorado, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, NewMexico, Oregon, Texas, Utah, Washington,Wyoming.

Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151

! WARNING:The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or exces-sive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildupand possible tire failure.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Qual-ity grades can be found on the tiresidewall between the tread shoulderand the maximum section width.For example:Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

Page 250: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

15REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

I130C02A-AAT

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingHYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. IfNHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in in-dividual problems between you, yourdealer, or HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may either callthe Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236.) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.Department of Transportation, Wash-ington. D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motor vehiclesafety from the Hotline.

I140A01A-AAT

BINDING ARBITRATION

Any claim or dispute you may haverelated to your vehicle's warranty or theduties contemplated under the warranty,including claims related to the refund orpartial refund of your vehicle's purchaseprice (excluding personal injury or prod-uct liability claims), shall be resolvedby binding arbitration. Binding arbitra-tion shall be administered by and throughthe National Arbitration Forum (NAF) orthe American Arbitration Association(AAA), under the Code of Procedure ofthe entity you select.You will not be responsible for payingfiling and hearing fees above $275.00.All other arbitration costs shall be borneby Hyundai Motor America. You are notresponsible to pay any of the costsHyundai incurs.

This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallnot deprive you of any remedies avail-able to you under applicable law. Theparties are waiving their right to seekremedies in court, including the right toa jury trial.This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallbe governed by and interpretedunder the Federal Arbitration Act, 9U.S.C. sections 1-16. Judgment uponany award may be entered in any courthaving jurisdiction.You may revoke this Arbitration Agree-ment by (1) written notice or (2) elec-tronic notice. Written notice must bedelivered (via certified mail) to HyundaiMotor America, Attn: Consumer Af-fairs, 10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box20849, Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.Electronic notice must be submitted atthe following website address :h t t p : / / w a r r a n t y - a r b i t r a t i o n .hyundaiUSA.com. Notice must be re-ceived within 90 days after you pur-chase your vehicle.

BINDING ARBITRATION

Page 251: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

9Measurement ................................................................ 9-2Engine ........................................................................... 9-3Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4

9

Page 252: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

J050A01GK-GAT

BRAKE

J040A03GK-GET

ELECTRICAL

J030A01GK-AAT

TIRE

J060A01F-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J020A01GK-AAT

POWER STEERING

J010A01GK-AAT

MEASUREMENT

173(4395)

69.3(1760)

52.4(1330)

99.6(2530)

58.7(1490)

58.7(1490)

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height (unladen)

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

Type

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 1.18 in.(0 ~ 30 mm)

5.20 in.(132 mm)

Vane type

Liter

55Fuel tank capacity

Option 205/55 R16, 215/45 R17

Item

Battery

Alternator

US.gal

14.5

in.(mm)

Imp.gal

12

J035A01GK-GAT

SPARE TIRE

Standard T125/70 R16 (Temporary)

2.0L

MF 68AH

90A

2.7L

MF 68AH

120A

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Solid Disc

Cable

Page 253: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3

2.0 L

4-Cyl., In-line DOHC CVVT

82 x 93.5

1,975

1 - 3 - 4 - 2

0.0067 ~ 0.0091 in.(0.17 ~ 0.23 mm)

0.0098 ~ 0.0122 in.(0.25 ~ 0.31 mm )

0.0047 ~ 0.011 in.(0.12 ~ 0.28 mm)

0.0079 ~ 0.015 in.(0.2 ~ 0.38 mm)

PFR5N-11

700 ± 100

BTDC 8° ± 5°

SPECIFICATION

RC10PYPB4

0.039 ~ 0.043 in. (1.0 ~ 1.1 mm)

2.7 L

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

86.7 x 75

2,656

1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

AUTO LASH

PFR5N-11, IFR5G-11

750 ± 100

BTDC 12° ± 10°

ENGINE

J070A04GK-AAT

ITEMS

Engine Type

Bore x Stroke (mm)

Displacement (cc)

Firing order

Valve clearance

(Cold Engine : 20 ± 5°C)

Spark plug

Spark plug gap

Idle speed (RPM)

Ignition timing (Base)

For adjusting

For checking

NGK

CHAMPION

Intake

Exhaust

Intake

Exhaust

Page 254: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4

Oil & Grease Standard

HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4)

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III,

SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved

by Hundai Motor Co..

PSF-3

DOT 3 or DOT 4 equivalent

Ethylene glycol base for aluminium radiator

LUBRICATION CHART

J080A05GK-AAT

API SJ,SL or ABOVE,

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

SAE 5W-20, 5W-30

SAE 10W-30 [ABOVE 0°F(-18°C)]

Item

Engine Oil

Transaxle

Power Steering

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Coolant

Manual

Auto

Q'ty (u.s.qts.) (liter, Imp. qts.)

(Drain and refill)

Engine Oil (with oil filter):

2.0 L :4.2 (4.0, 3.5)

2.7L : 4.76 (4.5, 4.0)

5 speed : 2.27 (2.15, 1.86), 6 speed : 2.32 (2.2, 1.94)

8.2 (7.8, 6.9)

As required

As required

2.0L : 7.4 (7.0, 6.2) 2.7L : 8.5 (8.0, 7.0)

Page 255: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

INDEX

1010

Page 256: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

10 INDEX

2

AAir Bag ...............................................................................................1-26Air Cleaner Filter ............................................................................... 6-12Air Conditioning

Care .............................................................................................. 6-19Operation ......................................................................................6-20Switch ........................................................................................... 1-75

Air Conditioner Filter ..........................................................................1-84Antenna .......................................................................................... 1-125Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................................................2-11Ashtray .............................................................................................. 1-52Automatic Transaxle ........................................................................... 2-7Auto Remote Control Switch ............................................................. 1-67

BBattery ..................................................................................... 2-16, 6-23Binding arbitration ..............................................................................8-15Brake

Anti-lock system ..........................................................................2-11Checking the brakes ....................................................................6-17Fluid .............................................................................................. 6-18Pedal clearance ...........................................................................6-23Pedal free-play .............................................................................6-23Practices ......................................................................................2-11

Breaking-In your new Hyundai ...........................................................1-3Bulbs Wattage ...................................................................................6-39

CCare of Cassette tapes .................................................................. 1-123Care of Disc ................................................................................... 1-123Cassette Tape Player Operation

(H250, H280, J290) ............................................. 1-91, 1-105, 1-113Catalytic Converter ............................................................................. 7-3CD Auto Changer (H260, H280, J290) .................... 1-99, 1-110, 1-118Child Restraint System ......................................................... 1-20 ~ 1-24Cigarette Lighter ................................................................................1-51Clutch

Checking fluid ............................................................................... 6-19Pedal free-play .............................................................................6-22

Combination LightAuto Light ......................................................................................1-46Headlight flasher ..........................................................................1-47Headlight switch ...........................................................................1-46High-beam switch ........................................................................1-46Lane change signal ...................................................................... 1-45Turn signal operation ................................................................... 1-45

Compact Disc Player Operation(H260, H280, J290) ............................................. 1-96, 1-107, 1-118

Consumer Information ...................................................................... 8-11Cooling Fans ..................................................................................... 6-27Corrosion Protection

Cleaning the interior ....................................................................... 4-5Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ....................................... 4-2Washing and waxing ...................................................................... 4-3

Cruise Control ...................................................................................1-65

Page 257: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

10INDEX

3

DDefrosting/Defogging ........................................................................ 1-77Door

Central door lock ............................................................................ 1-6Door locks ...................................................................................... 1-4Front door edge warning light ...................................................... 1-59Locking, unlocking front door with a key ...................................... 1-5

Drink Holder ...................................................................................... 1-52Drive Belts .............................................................................. 6-20, 6-23Driving

Economical driving .......................................................................2-14Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-15Winter driving ............................................................................... 2-15

EElectronic Stability Program (ESP) ................................................... 2-12Emissions Control Systems ............................................................... 7-1Engine

Before starting the engine .............................................................. 2-3Compartment ................................................................................. 6-2Coolant ........................................................................................... 6-7Coolant temperature gauge ......................................................... 1-40If the engine overheats .................................................................. 3-4Number ........................................................................................... 8-2Oil ................................................................................................... 6-5Starting ........................................................................................... 2-4

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous .................................................. 2-2

FFloor mat Anchor ..............................................................................1-64Front Fog Light Switch ...................................................................... 1-49Front Seats

Adjustable front seats ....................................................................1-9Adjustable headrests ................................................................... 1-11Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-10Adjusting seat forward and rearward ..........................................1-10Lumbar support control ...............................................................1-11Seat cushion height adjustment ..................................................1-12

FuelCapacity .........................................................................................9-2Gauge ........................................................................................... 1-40Recommendations ......................................................................... 1-2

Fuel Filler LidRemote release ............................................................................ 1-60

FusesFuse Panel Description ...............................................................6-40

GGeneral Everyday Checks .................................................................6-4Glove box ..........................................................................................1-56

HHazard Warning System ..................................................................1-50Headlight Aiming Adjustment ............................................................6-29Headlight Bulb ....................................................................................6-30

Page 258: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

10 INDEX

4

Heating and cooling controlRotary Type .................................................................................1-69Automatic Type ............................................................................ 1-78

High-mounted Rear Stop light ...........................................................1-58Hood Release ....................................................................................1-59Horn ................................................................................................. 1-63

IIgnition Switch ......................................................................................2-3Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ........................................... 1-34Intermittent Wiper ..............................................................................1-48

JJump Starting ......................................................................................3-3

KKeys ................................................................................................... 1-3

If you lose your keys ................................................................... 3-14Positions .........................................................................................2-3

LLubrication Chart ................................................................................. 9-4Luggage Net ......................................................................................1-64

MMaintenance Intervals

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............................... 5-7Maintenance under severe usage conditions ............................... 5-6Scheduled maintenance ................................................................ 5-4Service requirements .................................................................... 5-2

Map Light ........................................................................................... 1-55Mirror

Day-night inside rearview ............................................................1-57Outside rear view ......................................................................... 1-56

OOdometer ..........................................................................................1-41

PParking Brake ....................................................................................1-58Power Steering Fluid Level ...............................................................6-28Power Window .................................................................................... 1-8Pre-tensioner Seat Belt .....................................................................1-24

RRadio (H250, H260, H280, J290) .................... 1-88, 1-93, 1-102, 1-113Rear Seats

Before folding the rear seats ....................................................... 1-13Fold down ..................................................................................... 1-13Rear seat entry ............................................................................ 1-12Rear seat positions ...................................................................... 1-12

Rear Window Defroster Switch ........................................................1-50Reporting Safety Defects .................................................................8-15

Page 259: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

10INDEX

5

SSeat Belts

3-Point system .............................................................................1-17Adjustable height ..........................................................................1-17Adjusting your seat belt ............................................................... 1-19Care of seat belts ......................................................................... 1-16Precautions .................................................................................. 1-14

Spark Plugs ....................................................................................... 6-10Spectacle Case ................................................................................. 1-55Speedometer ..................................................................................... 1-40Starting Procedures ............................................................................ 2-5Steering Wheel

Free-play ......................................................................................6-22Tilt lever ........................................................................................ 1-63

Stereo Radio Operation(H250, H260, H280, J290) ......................... 1-88, 1-93, 1-102, 1-113

Stereo Sound System .......................................................................1-86Sun Visor ........................................................................................... 1-63Sunroof .............................................................................................. 1-53

TTachometer .......................................................................................1-41Tail Gate ............................................................................................1-61Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch .........................................1-49Theft-alarm System ............................................................................ 1-6Tires

All season tires ............................................................................... 8-8Balancing ......................................................................................8-10Chains ............................................................................................8-9Changing a flat tire ......................................................................... 3-6If you have a flat tire .......................................................................3-6Information ......................................................................................8-2Pressure .........................................................................................8-3Replacement ................................................................................8-10Rotation .......................................................................................... 8-9Sidewall labeling .............................................................................8-4Snow tires ....................................................................................... 8-8Spare tire ........................................................................................ 3-5Summer tires .................................................................................. 8-8Terminology and definitions ...........................................................8-6Traction ........................................................................................ 8-10

TowingA trailer (or vehicle) ...................................................................... 2-18Emergency ...................................................................................3-13If your vehicle must be towed ......................................................3-11

Page 260: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

10 INDEX

6

TransaxleAutomatic ........................................................................................ 2-7Automatic transaxle fluid checking .............................................. 6-15Manual ............................................................................................2-5Manual transaxle oil checking .....................................................6-14

Trip Computer ...................................................................................1-42Trip Odometer ...................................................................................1-41

VVehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................................................... 8-2Vehicle Load Limit .............................................................................2-21Vehicle Specification ........................................................................... 9-1Ventilation

Center ventilator ...........................................................................1-69Side ventilator ............................................................................... 1-69

WWarning Lights .................................................................................. 1-36Warranties for Your Hyundai ............................................................8-12Windshield Wiper and Washer .......................................................... 1-47Windshield Wiper Blades ..................................................................6-12

Page 261: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

A000A01A-AAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL OWNER

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

DELIVERY DATE

(Date Sold to Original Retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

Page 262: gkflhma-11 · 2019-12-20 · OWNER'S MANUAL A030A05F-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,

Seoul Korea

Printing: ARR. 08, 2005Publication No.: A2CO-EU54DPrinted in Korea

SERVICE STATION INFORMATIONFUEL:UNLEADED gasoline onlyPump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

FUEL TANK CAPACITYOriginal, U.S.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 14.5 (12, 55)

TIRE PRESSURE:See the label on the driver side center pillar outer panel.

OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:See pages 8-2 through 8-14.

HOOD RELEASE:Pull handle under left side of dash.

ENGINE OIL:API grade SJ, SL or ABOVE / ILSAC grade GF-3 or ABOVE and fuelefficient oil. Use SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 or 10W-30 if normal temperaturesare above 0°F (-18°C). See page 6-5 or 9-4.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE:HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) Oil levelshould be up to filler-bolt hole in housing beside differential.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:Apply the parking brake, with the engine running, shift the selector leverthrough all ranges and return to “N” (Neutral) position. Then check the levelof fluid on the dipstick. Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SPIII specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co..

QUICK INDEXo Car will not start ........................................................................ 3-2o Flat tire ...................................................................................... 3-6o Warning light/chime comes on ...................................... 1-36 ~ 1-39o Engine overheats ....................................................................... 3-4o Towing of your vehicle ............................................................. 3-11o Starting the engine ..................................................................... 2-4o Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ............................ 1-3o Scheduled maintenance ............................................................. 5-4o Reporting safety defects .......................................................... 8-15

gkflhma-11.p65 4/8/2005, 1:29 PM2